Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

One by whose influence

  • 1 auctor

    auctor (incorrectly written autor or author), ōris, comm. [id.], he that brings about the existence of any object, or promotes the increase or prosperity of it, whether he first originates it, or by his efforts gives greater permanence or continuance to it; to be differently translated according to the object, creator, maker, author, inventor, producer, father, founder, teacher, composer, cause, voucher, supporter, leader, head, etc. (syn.: conditor, origo, consiliarius, lator, suasor, princeps, dux).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    Of persons, a progenitor, father, ancestor:

    L. Brutus, praeclarus auctor nobilitatis tuae,

    the founder, progenitor of your nobility, Cic. Tusc. 4, 1, 2:

    generis,

    Verg. A. 4, 365; so Ov. M. 4, 640, and Suet. Vit. 2:

    tu sanguinis ultimus auctor,

    Verg. A. 7, 49; so Ov. M. 12, 558, and 13, 142:

    tantae propaginis,

    id. F. 3, 157:

    originis,

    Suet. Ner. 1:

    gentis,

    id. Claud. 25:

    auctores parentes animarum,

    Vulg. Sap. 12, 6:

    auctore ab illo ducit originem,

    Hor. C. 3, 17, 5:

    Sive neglectum genus et nepotes Respicis auctor,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 36:

    mihi Tantalus auctor,

    Ov. M. 6, 172:

    auctores saxa fretumque tui,

    id. H. 10, 132:

    Juppiter e terrā genitam mentitur, ut auctor Desinat inquiri,

    id. M. 1, 615.—Of animals, Col. 6, 27, 1.—
    B.
    Of buildings, etc., founder, builder:

    Trojae Cynthius auctor,

    Verg. G. 3, 36:

    murorum Romulus auctor,

    Prop. 5, 6, 43 ( augur, Müll.):

    auctor posuisset in oris Moenia,

    Ov. M. 15, 9:

    porticus auctoris Livia nomen habet,

    id. A. A. 1, 72:

    amphitheatri,

    Plin. 36, 15, 24, § 118:

    omnia sub titulo tantum suo ac sine ullā pristini auctoris memoriā,

    Suet. Dom. 5.—
    C.
    Of works of art, a maker, artist:

    statua auctoris incerti,

    Plin. 34, 8, 19, § 93: apparuit summam artis securitatem auctori placaisse, id. praef. § 27.—
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    In gen., the originator, executor, performer, doer, cause, occasion of other things (freq. interchanged with actor):

    tametsi haud quaquam par gloriá sequitur scriptorem et auctorem rerum, tamen etc.,

    Sall. C. 3, 2 Kritz (cf. without rerum: Suam quisque culpam auctores ad negotia transferunt, id. J. 1, 4):

    praeclari facinoris,

    Vell. 2, 120, 6:

    facti,

    Ov. M. 9, 206; Vell. 1, 8:

    cum perquirerent auctorem facti,

    Vulg. Jud. 6, 29:

    optimi statūs auctor,

    Suet. Aug. 28:

    honoris,

    Ov. M. 10, 214:

    vitae,

    Vulg. Act. 3, 15:

    salutis,

    ib. Heb. 2, 10:

    fidei,

    ib. ib. 12, 2:

    funeris,

    Ov. M. 10, 199:

    necis,

    id. ib. 8, 449;

    9, 214: mortis,

    id. ib. 8, 493:

    vulneris,

    id. ib. 5, 133;

    8, 418: plagae,

    id. ib. 3, 329:

    seditionis sectae,

    Vulg. Act. 24, 5.—Also, in gen., one from whom any thing proceeds or comes:

    auctor in incerto est: jaculum de parte sinistrā Venit,

    i. e. the sender, Ov. M. 12, 419; so,

    teli,

    id. ib. 8, 349:

    muneris,

    the giver, id. ib. 2, 88;

    5, 657, 7, 157 al.: meritorum,

    id. ib. 8, 108 al.—
    B.
    An author of scientific or literary productions.
    1.
    An investigator:

    non sordidus auctor Naturae verique,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 14.—And as imparting learning, a teacher:

    quamquam in antiquissimā philosophiā Cratippo auctore versaris,

    Cic. Off. 2, 2, 8:

    dicendi gravissimus auctor et magister Plato,

    id. Or. 3, 10:

    divini humanique juris auctor celeberrimus,

    Vell. 2, 26, 2:

    Servius Sulpicius, juris civilis auctor,

    Gell. 2, 10; Dig. 19, 1, 39; 40, 7, 36.—
    2.
    The author of a writing, a writer:

    ii quos nunc lectito auctores,

    Cic. Att. 12, 18:

    ingeniosus poëta et auctor valde bonus,

    id. Mur. 14:

    scripta auctori perniciosa suo,

    Ov. Tr. 5, 1, 68:

    Belli Alexandrini Africique et Hispaniensis incertus auctor est,

    Suet. Caes. 56; id. Aug. 31:

    sine auctore notissimi versus,

    i. e. anonymous verses, id. ib. 70; so id. Calig. 8; id. Dom. 8 al.— Meton. of cause for effect, for a literary production, writing, work:

    in evolvendis utriusque linguae auctoribus, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 89. —In partic., the author of historical works, an historian (with and without rerum):

    ego cautius posthac historiam attingam, te audiente, quem rerum Romanarum auctorem laudare possum religiosissimum,

    Cic. Brut. 11, 44; so,

    Matrem Antoniam non apud auctores rerum, non diurnā actorum scripturā reperio ullo insigni officio functam,

    Tac. A. 3, 3; 3, 30 (diff. from auctor rerum in II. A.):

    Polybius bonus auctor in primis,

    Cic. Off. 3, 32, 113; so Nep. Them. 10, 4; Liv. 4, 20; Tac. A. 5, 9; 14, 64 al.—With historiae (eccl. Lat.):

    historiae congruit auctori,

    Vulg. 2 Macc. 2, 31.—Hence, in gen., one that gives an account of something, a narrator, reporter, informant (orally or in writing):

    sibi insidias fieri: se id certis auctoribus comperisse,

    Cic. Att. 14, 8:

    celeberrimos auctores habeo tantam victoribus irreverentiam fuisse, ut, etc.,

    Tac. H. 3, 51:

    criminis ficti auctor, i. e. nuntius,

    Ov. M. 7, 824:

    Non haec tibi nuntiat auctor Ambiguus,

    id. ib. 11, 666; 12, 58; 12, 61; 12, 532.—Hence, auctorem esse, with acc. and inf., to relate, recount:

    Auctores sunt ter novenis punctis interfici hominem,

    Plin. 11, 21, 24, § 73:

    Fabius Rustiçus auctor est scriptos esse ad Caecinam Tuscum codicillos,

    Tac. A. 13, 20:

    Auctor est Julius Marathus ante paucos quam nasceretur menses prodigium Romae factum (esse) publice, etc.,

    Suet. Aug. 94 et saep.—
    C.
    One by whose influence, advice, command, etc., any thing is done, the cause, occasion, contriver, instigator, counsellor, adviser, promoter; constr. sometimes with ut, acc. and inf., or gen. gerund.: quid mihi es auctor ( what do you counsel me?) huic ut mittam? Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 2; 4, 7, 70; id. Poen. 1, 3, 1:

    idne estis auctores mihi?

    Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 16:

    mihique ut absim, vehementer auctor est,

    Cic. Att. 15, 5:

    Gellium ipsis (philosophis) magno opere auctorem fuisse, ut controversiarum facerent modum,

    id. Leg. 1, 20, 53:

    ut propinqui de communi sententiā coërcerent, auctor fuit,

    Suet. Tib. 35; id. Claud. 25; id. Calig. 15:

    a me consilium petis, qui sim tibi auctor in Siciliāne subsidas, an proficiscare,

    Cic. Fam. 6, 8: ego quidem tibi non sim auctor, si Pompeius Italiam reliquit, te quoque profugere, Att. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 10:

    ne auctor armorum duxque deesset, Auct. B. G. 8, 47: auctor facinori non deerat,

    Liv. 2, 54:

    auctores Bibulo fuere tantundem pollicendi,

    Suet. Caes. 19:

    auctores restituendae tribuniciae potestatis,

    id. ib. 5; so id. Dom. 8:

    auctor singulis universisque conspirandi simul et ut... communem causam juvarent,

    id. Galb. 10 al. —So freq. in the abl. absol.: me, te, eo auctore, at my, your, his instance, by my [p. 199] advice, command, etc.:

    non me quidem Faciet auctore, hodie ut illum decipiat,

    Plaut. Stich. 4, 2, 23:

    an paenitebat flagiti, te auctore quod fecisset Adulescens?

    Ter. Eun. 5, 6, 12:

    quare omnes istos me auctore deridete atque contemnite,

    Cic. de Or. 3, 14, 54:

    quia calida fomenta non proderant, frigidis curari coactus auctore Antonio Musā,

    Suet. Aug. 81; 96; id. Galb. 19; id. Vit. 2 al.: agis Carminibus grates et dis auctoribus horum, the promoters or authors of spells, Ov. M. 7, 148.—
    2.
    Esp., in political lang., t. t.
    a.
    Auctor legis.
    (α).
    One who proposes a law, a mover, proposer (very rare):

    quarum legum auctor fuerat, earum suasorem se haud dubium ferebat,

    Liv. 6, 36:

    Quid desperatius, qui ne ementiendo quidem potueris auctorem adumbrare meliorem,

    Cic. Dom. 30, 80.—
    (β).
    One who advises the proposal of a law, and exerts all his influence to have it passed, a supporter (stronger than suasor; cf. Suet. Tib. 27:

    alium dicente, auctore eo Senatum se adīsse, verba mutare et pro auctore suasorem dicere coegit): isti rationi neque lator quisquam est inventus neque auctor umquam bonus,

    Cic. Leg. 3, 15, 34:

    cum ostenderem, si lex utilis plebi Romanae mihi videretur, auctorem me atque adjutorem futurum (esse),

    id. Agr. 2, 5; id. Att. 1, 19:

    quo auctore societatem cum Perseo junxerunt,

    Liv. 45, 31; Suet. Oth. 8; id. Vesp. 11 al.—Sometimes in connection with suasor:

    atque hujus deditionis ipse Postumius suasor et auctor fuit,

    Cic. Off. 3, 30, 109:

    Nisi quis retinet, idem suasor auctorque consilii ero,

    Tac. H. 3, 2 al. —
    (γ).
    Of a senate which accepts or adopts a proposition for a law, a confirmer, ratifier:

    nunc cum loquar apud senatores populi Romani, legum et judiciorum et juris auctores,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 67.— Poet., in gen., a law-giver:

    animum ad civilia vertet Jura suum, legesque feret justissimus auctor,

    Ov. M. 15, 833;

    and of one who establishes conditions of peace: leges captis justissimus auctor imposuit,

    id. ib. 8, 101. —Hence, auctores fieri, to approve, accept, confirm a law:

    cum de plebe consulem non accipiebat, patres ante auctores fieri coëgerit,

    Cic. Brut. 14, 55:

    Decreverunt ut, cum populus regem jussisset, id sic ratum esset, si patres auctores fierent,

    Liv. 1, 17; 1, 22; 2, 54; 2, 56; 6, 42; 8, 12 al.—
    b.
    Auctor consilii publici, he who has the chief voice in the senate, a leader:

    hunc rei publicae rectorem et consilii publici auctorem esse habendum,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 48, 211; 3, 17, 63. —Also absol.:

    regem Ariobarzanem, cujus salutem a senatu te auctore, commendatam habebam,

    by your influence, and the decree of the senate occasioned by it, Cic. Fam. 15, 4, 6; cf. Gron. ad Liv. 24, 43.—
    D.
    One who is an exemplar, a model, pattern, type of any thing:

    Caecilius, malus auctor Latinitatis,

    Cic. Att. 7, 3, 10:

    nec litterarum Graecarum, nec philosophiae jam ullum auctorem requiro,

    id. Ac. 2, 2, 5; cf.

    Wopk. Lect. Tull. p. 34: unum cedo auctorem tui facti, unius profer exemplum,

    i. e. who has done a similar thing, Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 26:

    Cato omnium virtutum auctor,

    id. Fin. 4, 16, 44 al. —
    E.
    One that becomes security for something, a voucher, bail, surety, witness:

    id ita esse ut credas, rem tibi auctorem dabo,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 70:

    auctorem rumorem habere,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 19: fama nuntiabat te esse in Syriā;

    auctor erat nemo,

    id. Fam. 12, 4:

    non si mihi Juppiter auctor Spondeat,

    Verg. A. 5, 17:

    gravis quamvis magnae rei auctor,

    Liv. 1, 16:

    auctorem levem, nec satis fidum super tantā re Patres rati,

    id. 5, 15 fin.:

    urbs auspicato deis auctoribus in aeternum condita,

    under the guaranty of the gods, id. 28, 28.—Also with acc. and inf.:

    auctores sumus tutam ibi majestatem Romani nominis fore,

    Liv. 2, 48.—
    F.
    In judic. lang., t. t.
    1.
    A seller, vender (inasmuch as he warrants the right of possession of the thing to be sold, and transfers it to the purchaser; sometimes the jurists make a distinction between auctor primus and auctor secundus; the former is the seller himself, the latter the bail or security whom the former brings, Dig. 21, 2, 4; cf.

    Salmas. Mod. Usur. pp. 728 and 733): quod a malo auctore emīssent,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 22:

    auctor fundi,

    id. Caecin. 10; Dig. 19, 1, 52: Inpero (auctor ego sum), ut tu me quoivis castrandum loces, Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 73 Wagn.; id. Ep. 3, 2, 21; id. Curc. 4, 2, 12.— Trop.:

    auctor beneficii populi Romani,

    Cic. Mur. 2.—
    2.
    A guardian, trustee (of women and minors):

    dos quam mulier nullo auctore dixisset,

    Cic. Caecin. 25:

    majores nostri nullam ne privatam quidem rem agere feminas sine auctore voluerunt,

    Liv. 34, 2:

    pupillus obligari tutori eo auctore non potest,

    Dig. 26, 8, 5.—
    3.
    In espousals, auctores are the witnesses of the marriage contract (parents, brothers, guardians, relatives, etc.):

    nubit genero socrus, nullis auspicibus, nullis auctoribus,

    Cic. Clu. 5.—
    G.
    An agent, factor, spokesman, intercessor, champion:

    praeclarus iste auctor suae civitatis,

    Cic. Fl. 22:

    (Plancius) princeps inter suos... maximarum societatum auctor, plurimarum magister,

    id. Planc. 13, 22:

    meae salutis,

    id. Sest. 50, 107:

    doloris sui, querelarum, etc.,

    id. Fl. 22 fin.
    ► In class.
    Lat. auctor is also used as fem.:

    eas aves, quibus auctoribus etc.,

    Cic. Div. 1, 15, 27:

    Et hostes aderant et (Theoxena) auctor mortis instabat,

    Liv. 40, 4, 15:

    auctor ego (Juno) audendi,

    Verg. A. 12, 159; Ov. M. 8, 108; id. F. 5, 192; 6, 709; id. H. 14, 110; 15, 3; Sen. Med. 968; cf. Paul. ex Fest. p. 29 Müll. The distinction which the grammarians, Serv. ad Verg. A. 12, 159, Prob. p. 1452 sq. P., and others make between auctor fem. and auctrix, that auctrix would refer more to the lit. signif. of the verb, augeo, while auctor fem. has more direct relation to the prevailing signif. of its noun, auctoritas, is unfounded.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > auctor

  • 2 ejercer influencia

    (v.) = exert + influence, wield + influence, deliver + clout
    Ex. The subject analysis of a document exerts a controlling influence on all the subsequent steps involved in its subject content.
    Ex. No one needs to be told that children wield powerful persuasive influences upone each other.
    Ex. This article discusses how librarians can slay these dragons by banding together to deliver more clout.
    * * *
    ejercer influencia (sobre)
    (v.) = come to + bear influence (on)

    Ex: Spreading out from the doorstep is a wider social group whose influence comes to bear on children, particularly after they are old enough to wander at large on their own.

    (v.) = exert + influence, wield + influence, deliver + clout

    Ex: The subject analysis of a document exerts a controlling influence on all the subsequent steps involved in its subject content.

    Ex: No one needs to be told that children wield powerful persuasive influences upone each other.
    Ex: This article discusses how librarians can slay these dragons by banding together to deliver more clout.

    Spanish-English dictionary > ejercer influencia

  • 3 deambular libremente

    (v.) = wander + at large, roam + free
    Ex. Spreading out from the doorstep is a wider social group whose influence comes to bear on children, particularly after they are old enough to wander at large on their own.
    Ex. While in traditional working society, everybody was kept busy, and out of trouble, a leisured society would be one in which people roamed free and unfettered, and capable of absolutely anything.
    * * *
    (v.) = wander + at large, roam + free

    Ex: Spreading out from the doorstep is a wider social group whose influence comes to bear on children, particularly after they are old enough to wander at large on their own.

    Ex: While in traditional working society, everybody was kept busy, and out of trouble, a leisured society would be one in which people roamed free and unfettered, and capable of absolutely anything.

    Spanish-English dictionary > deambular libremente

  • 4 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    ① marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    ⓐ w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    ⓑ w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    ⓒ w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    ② marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    ⓐ w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    ⓑ with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    ③ marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    ④ marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    ⓐ w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.—To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    ⑤ marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    ⑥ marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ⓐ ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    ⓑ w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    ⓒ after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    ⑦ marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    ⑧ marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    ⑨ marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    ⓐ w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    ⓑ w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    ⓒ w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    ⑩ marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    ⑪ marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    ⑫ marker of hostile opposition, against
    ⓐ w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    ⓑ w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    ⑬ marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    ⑭ marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    ⓐ w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    ⓑ w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    ⑮ marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    ⑯ marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    ⑰ marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    ⑱ marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    ⓐ w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    ⓑ w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    ⓒ w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 5 Young, Arthur

    [br]
    b. 11 September 1741 London, England
    d. 20 April 1820 Bradford, England
    [br]
    English writer and commentator on agricultural affairs; founder and Secretary of the Board of Agriculture (later the Ministry of Agriculture, Fisheries and Food).
    [br]
    He was the youngest of the three children of Dr Arthur Young, who was at one time Chaplain to the Speaker of the House of Commons. He learned Latin and Greek at Lavenham School, and at the age of 17 was apprenticed to a mercantile house, an occupation he disliked. He first published The Theatre of the Present War in North America in 1758. He then wrote four novels and began to produce the literary magazine The Universal Museum. After his father's death he returned home to manage his father's farm, and in 1765 he married Martha Allen.
    Young learned farming by experiment, and three years after his return he took over the rent of a 300 acre farm, Samford Hall in Essex. He was not a practical farmer, and was soon forced to give it up in favour of one of 100 acres (40.5 hectares) in Hertfordshire. He subsidized his farming with his writing, and in 1768 published The Farmer's Letters to the People of England. The first of his books on agricultural tours, Six Weeks Tours through the Counties of England and Wales, was published in 1771. Between 1784 and 1809 he published the Annals of Agriculture, one of whose contributors was George III, who wrote under the pseudonym of Ralph Robinson.
    By this time he was corresponding with all of influence in agricultural matters, both at home and abroad. George Washington wrote frequently to Young, and George III was reputed to travel always with a copy of his book. The Empress of Russia sent students to him and had his Tours published in Russian. Young made three trips to France in 1787, 1788 and 1789–90 respectively, prior to and during the French Revolution, and his Travels in France (1792) is a remarkable account of that period, made all the more fascinating by his personal contact with people differing as widely as Mirabeau, the French revolutionary leader, and King Louis XVI.
    Unfortunately, in 1811 an unsuccessful cataract operation left him blind, and he moved from London to his native Bradford, where he remained until his death.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    Chairman, Agricultural Committee of the Society of Arts 1773: awarded three Gold Medals during his career for his achievements in practical agriculture. FRS. Honorary Member of the Dublin, York and Manchester learned societies, as well as the Economic Society of Berne, the Palatine Academy of Agriculture at Mannheim, and the Physical Society of Zurich. Honourary member, French Royal Society of Agriculture. Secretary, Board of Agriculture 1793.
    Bibliography
    His first novels were The Fair Americans, Sir Charles Beaufort, Lucy Watson and Julia Benson.
    His earliest writings on agriculture appeared as collected letters in a periodical with the title Museum Rusticum in 1767.
    In 1770 he published a two-volume work entitled A Course of Experimental Agriculture, and between 1766 and 1775 he published The Farmer's Letters, Political Arithmetic, Political Essays Concerning the Present State of the British Empire and Southern, Northern and Eastern Tours, and in 1779 he published The Tour of Ireland.
    In addition he was author of the Board of Agriculture reports on the counties of Suffolk, Lincoln, Norfolk, Hertford, Essex and Oxford.
    Further Reading
    J.Thirsk (ed.), 1989, The Agrarian History of England and Wales, Vol. VI (deals with the years 1750 to 1850, the period associated with Young).
    T.G.Gazeley, 1973, "The life of Arthur Young, 1741–1820", Memoirs, American Philosophical Society 97.
    AP

    Biographical history of technology > Young, Arthur

  • 6 ἁμαρτία

    ἁμαρτία, ίας, ἡ (w. mngs. ranging fr. involuntary mistake/ error to serious offenses against a deity: Aeschyl., Antiphon, Democr.+; ins fr. Cyzicus JHS 27, 1907, p. 63 [III B.C.] ἁμαρτίαν μετανόει; PLips 119 recto, 3; POxy 1119, 11; LXX; En, TestSol, TestAbr, TestJob, Test12Patr; JosAs 12:14; ParJer, ApcEsdr, ApcSed, ApcMos; EpArist 192; Philo; Jos., Ant. 13, 69 al.; Ar. [Milne 76, 42]; Just., A I, 61, 6; 10; 66, 1, D. 13, 1 al.; Tat. 14, 1f; 20, 1; Mel., P. 50, 359; 55, 400; s. ClR 24, 1910, 88; 234; 25, 1911, 195–97).
    ① a departure fr. either human or divine standards of uprightness
    ⓐ sin (w. context ordinarily suggesting the level of heinousness), the action itself (ἁμάρτησις s. prec.), as well as its result (ἁμάρτημα), πᾶσα ἀδικία ἁ. ἐστίν 1J 5:17 (cp. Eur., Or. 649; Gen 50:17). ἁ. w. ἀνομήματα Hv 1, 3, 1; descr. as ἀνομία (cp. Ps 58:3; TestJob 43:17) 1J 3:4; but one who loves is far from sin Pol 3:3, cp. Js 5:20; 1 Pt 4:8, 1 Cl 49:5; Agr 13. ἀναπληρῶσαι τὰς ἁ. fill up the measure of sins (Gen 15:16) 1 Th 2:16. κοινωνεῖν ἁ. ἀλλοτρίαις 1 Ti 5:22. ποιεῖν ἁ. commit a sin (Tob 12:10; 14:7S; Dt 9:21) 2 Cor 11:7; 1 Pt 2:22; Js 5:15; 1J 3:4, 8. For this ἁμαρτάνειν ἁ. (Ex 32:30; La 1:8) 1J 5:16; ἐργάζεσθαι ἁ. Js 2:9; Hm 4, 1, 2 (LXX oft. ἐργάζ. ἀδικίαν or ἀνομίαν). μεγάλην ἁ. ἐργάζεσθαι commit a great sin m 4, 1, 1; 8:2. Pl. (cp. Pla., Ep. 7, 335a τὰ μεγάλα ἁμαρτήματα κ. ἀδικήματα) Hs 7:2. ἐπιφέρειν ἁ. τινί Hv 1, 2, 4. ἑαυτῷ ἁ. ἐπιφέρειν bring sin upon oneself m 11:4; for this ἁ. ἐπισπᾶσθαί τινι m 4, 1, 8 (cp. Is 5:18). προστιθέναι ταῖς ἁ. add to one’s sins (cp. προσέθηκεν ἁμαρτίας ἐφʼ ἁμαρτίας PsSol 3:10) Hv 5:7; m 4, 3, 7; Hs 6, 2, 3; 8, 11, 3; φέρειν ἁ. 1 Cl 16:4 (Is 53:4). ἀναφέρειν vs. 14 (Is 53:12). γέμειν ἁμαρτιῶν B 11:11. εἶναι ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις 1 Cor 15:17 (cp. Alex. Aphr., Eth. Probl. 9 II 2 p. 129, 13 ἐν ἁμαρτήμασιν εἶναι).—Sin viewed from the perspective of God’s or Christ’s response: ἀφιέναι τὰς ἁ. let go = forgive sins (Lev 4:20 al.) Mt 9:2, 5f; Mk 2:5, 7, 9f; Lk 5:20ff; Hv 2, 2, 4; 1 Cl 50:5; 53:5 (Ex 32:32) al. (ἀφίημι 2); hence ἄφεσις (τῶν) ἁμαρτιῶν (Iren. 1, 21, 2 [Harv. I 182, 4]) forgiveness of sins Mt 26:28; Mk 1:4; Lk 1:77; 3:3; 24:47; Ac 2:38; 5:31; 10:43; 13:38; Hm 4, 3, 2; B 5:1; 6:11; 8:3; 11:1; 16:8. διδόναι ἄφεσιν ἁ. AcPl Ha 2, 30; λαβεῖν ἄφεσιν ἁ. receive forgiveness of sins Ac 26:18 (Just., D. 54 al); καθαρίζειν τὰς ἁ. cleanse the sins (thought of as a stain) Hs 5, 6, 3; καθαρίζειν ἀπὸ ἁ. 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4; cp. Sir 23:10; PsSol 10:1); also καθαρισμὸν ποιεῖσθαι τῶν ἁ. Hb 1:3; ἀπολούεσθαι τὰς ἁ. Ac 22:16 ([w. βαπτίζειν] Just., D. 13, 1 al.). λύτρον ἁ. ransom for sins B 19:10.—αἴρειν J 1:29; περιελεῖν ἁ. Hb 10:11; ἀφαιρεῖν (Ex 34:9; Is 27; 9) vs. 4; Hs 9, 28, 3; ῥυσθῆναι ἀπὸ ἁ. 1 Cl 60:3; ἀπὸ τῶν ἁ. ἀποσπασθῆναι AcPlCor 2:9. Sin as a burden αἱ ἁ. κατεβάρησαν Hs 9, 28, 6; as a disease ἰᾶσθαι Hs 9, 28, 5 (cp. Dt 30:3); s. also the verbs in question.—Looked upon as an entry in a ledger; hence ἐξαλείφεται ἡ ἁ. wiped away, cancelled (Ps 108:14; Jer 18:23; Is 43:25) Ac 3:19.—Opp. στῆσαι τὴν ἁ. 7:60; λογίζεσθαι ἁ. take account of sin (as a debt; cp. the commercial metaphor Ro 4:6 and s. FDanker, Gingrich Festschr. 104, n. 2) Ro 4:8 (Ps 31:2); 1 Cl 60:2 (Just., D. 141, 3). Pass. ἁ. οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται is not entered in the account Ro 5:13 (GFriedrich, TLZ 77, ’52, 523–28). Of sinners ὀφειλέτης ἁ. Pol 6:1 (cp. SIG 1042, 14–16 [II A.D.] ὸ̔ς ἂν δὲ πολυπραγμονήσῃ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ ἢ περιεργάσηται, ἁμαρτίαν ὀφιλέτω Μηνὶ Τυράννωι, ἣν οὐ μὴ δύνηται ἐξειλάσασθαι).—γινώσκειν ἁ. (cp. Num 32:23) Ro 7:7; Hm 4, 1, 5. ἐπίγνωσις ἁμαρτίας Ro 3:20; ὁμολογεῖν τὰς ἁ. 1J 1:9; ἐξομολογεῖσθε ἐπὶ ταῖς ἁ. B 19:12; ἐξομολογεῖσθαι τὰς ἁ. Mt 3:6; Mk 1:5; Hv 3, 1, 5f; Hs 9, 23, 4; ἐξομολογεῖσθε ἀλλήλοις τὰς ἁ. confess your sins to each other Js 5:16.—ἐλέγχειν τινὰ περὶ ἁ. convict someone of sin J 8:46; cp. ἵνα σου τὰς ἁ. ἐλέγξω πρὸς τὸν κύριον that I might reveal your sins before the Lord Hv 1, 1, 5.—σεσωρευμένος ἁμαρτίαις loaded down w. sins 2 Ti 3:6; cp. ἐπισωρεύειν ταῖς ἁ. B 4:6; ἔνοχος τῆς ἁ. involved in the sin Hm 2:2; 4, 1, 5. μέτοχος τῆς ἁ. m 4, 1, 9.—In Hb sin is atoned for (ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁ. 2:17) by sacrifices θυσίαι ὑπὲρ ἁ. 5:1 (cp. 1 Cl 41:2). προσφορὰ περὶ ἁ. sin-offering 10:18; also simply περὶ ἁ. (Lev 5:11; 7:37) vss. 6, 8 (both Ps 39:7; cp. 1 Pt 3:18); προσφέρειν περὶ ἁ. bring a sin-offering Hb 5:3; cp. 10:12; 13:11. Christ has made the perfect sacrifice for sin 9:23ff; συνείδησις ἁ. consciousness of sin 10:2; ἀνάμνησις ἁ. a reminder of sins of the feast of atonement vs. 3.
    ⓑ special sins (ἁ. τῆς ἀποστασίας Iren. 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 397, 4]): πρὸς θάνατον that leads to death 1J 5:16b (ἁμαρτάνω e); opp. οὐ πρὸς θάνατον vs. 17. μεγάλη ἁ. a great sin Hv 1, 1, 8 al. (Gen 20:9; Ex 32:30 al.; cp. Schol. on Pla., Tht. 189d ἁμαρτήματα μεγάλα). μείζων ἁ. m 11:4; ἥττων 1 Cl 47:4. μεγάλη κ. ἀνίατος Hm 5, 2, 4; τέλειαι ἁ. Hv 1, 2, 1; B 8:1, cp. τὸ τέλειον τῶν ἁ. 5:11 (Philo, Mos. 1, 96 κατὰ τῶν τέλεια ἡμαρτηκότων); ἡ προτέρα ἁ. (Arrian, Anab. 7, 23, 8 εἴ τι πρότερον ἡμάρτηκας) sin committed before baptism Hm 4, 1, 11; 4, 3, 3; Hs 8, 11, 3; cp. v 2, 1, 2.
    ② a state of being sinful, sinfulness, a prominent feature in Johannine thought, and opposed to ἀλήθεια; hence ἁ. ἔχειν J 9:41; 15:24; 1J 1:8. μείζονα ἁ. ἔχειν J 19:11; ἁ. μένει 9:41. γεννᾶσθαι ἐν ἁμαρτίαις be born in sin 9:34 (ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ v.l).; opp. ἐν ἁ. ἀποθανεῖν die in sin 8:21, 24; AcPl Ha 1, 16. ἁ. ἐν αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν 1J 3:5.
    ③ a destructive evil power, sin
    ⓐ Paul thinks of sin almost in pers. terms (cp. Sir 27:10; Mel., P. 50, 359; PGM 4, 1448 w. other divinities of the nether world, also Ἁμαρτίαι χθόνιαι; Dibelius, Geisterwelt 119ff) as a ruling power that invades the world. Sin came into the world Ro 5:12 (JFreundorfer, Erbsünde u. Erbtod b. Ap. Pls 1927; ELohmeyer, ZNW 29, 1930, 1–59; JSchnitzer, D. Erbsünde im Lichte d. Religionsgesch. ’31; ROtto, Sünde u. Urschuld ’32; FDanker, Ro 5:12: Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’67/68, 424–39), reigns there vs. 21; 6:14; everything was subject to it Gal 3:22; people serve it Ro 6:6; are its slaves vss. 17, 20; are sold into its service 7:14 or set free from it 6:22; it has its law 7:23; 8:2; it revives (ἀνέζησεν) Ro 7:9 or is dead vs. 8; it pays its wages, viz., death 6:23, cp. 5:12 (see lit. s.v. ἐπί 6c). As a pers. principle it dwells in humans Ro 7:17, 20, viz., in the flesh (s. σάρξ 2cα) 8:3; cp. vs. 2; 7:25. The earthly body is hence a σῶμα τῆς ἁ. 6:6 (Col 2:11 v.l.).—As abstr. for concr. τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁ. ὑπέρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν (God) made him, who never sinned, to be sin (i.e. the guilty one) for our sakes 2 Cor 5:21.
    ⓑ In Hb (as in OT) sin appears as the power that deceives humanity and leads it to destruction, whose influence and activity can be ended only by sacrifices (s. 1a end): ἀπάτη τῆς ἁ. Hb 3:13.—On the whole word s. ἁμαρτάνω, end. GMoore, Judaism I 445–52; ABüchler, Studies in Sin and Atonement in the Rabb. Lit. of the I Cent. 1928; WKnuth, D. Begriff der Sünde b. Philon v. Alex., diss. Jena ’34; EThomas, The Problem of Sin in the NT 1927; Dodd 76–81; DDaube, Sin, Ignorance and Forgiveness in the Bible, ’61; AGelin and ADescamps, Sin in the Bible, ’65.—On the special question ‘The Christian and Sin’ see PWernle 1897; HWindisch 1908; EHedström 1911; RBultmann, ZNW 23, 1924, 123–40; Windisch, ibid. 265–81; RSchulz, D. Frage nach der Selbsttätigkt. d. Menschen im sittl. Leben b. Pls., diss. Hdlb. ’40.—JAddison, ATR 33, ’51, 137–48; KKuhn, πειρασμός ἁμαρτία σάρξ im NT: ZTK 49, ’52, 200–222; JBremer, Hamartia ’69 (Gk. views).—B. 1182. EDNT. DELG s.v. ἁμαρτάνω. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἁμαρτία

  • 7 elaborate

    ̘. ̈a.ɪˈlæbərɪt
    1. прил.
    1) а) тщательно, детально разработанный;
    продуманный;
    законченный;
    скрупулезный, доскональный In scientific pursuits the preparations are usually elaborate. ≈ В научных занятиях обычно должна быть проведена тщательная подготовительная работа. б) уст. искусно сделанный;
    тонкой работы в) улучшенный, усовершенствованный
    2) старательный, аккуратный;
    усердный Syn: careful, painstaking
    2. ∙ Syn: elaborated
    2. гл.
    1) а) детально разрабатывать, обдумывать (on) Please elaborate on this question, we need to know more. ≈ Пожалуйста, проработайте этот вопрос подробнее, нам нужно больше данных. б) придавать законченный вид( теории, изобретению, произведению искусства)
    2) конкретизировать, развивать, уточнять
    3) производить;
    вырабатывать, перерабатывать( о синтезе веществ в природе) ;
    превращать, преобразовывать the sun, under whose influence one plant elaborates nutriment for man ≈ солнце, под действием которого растение вырабатывает питание для человека Honey is elaborated by the bee. ≈ Мед производят пчелы. тщательно, детально разработанный;
    продуманный;
    подготовленный - * plan тщательно продуманный план - * study детальное изучение - * preparations тщательная подготовка сложный - * design сложная конструкция - * hair-do замысловатая прическа - * dinner обед из многих блюд усложненный( о конструкции и т. п.) усовершенствованный, "умный" (о механизме) (устаревшее) усердный;
    старательный - * collector неутомимый собиратель( чего-л.) детально, тщательно разрабатывать или обдумывать;
    вырабатывать - to * a plan тщательно разработать план развивать, дополнять (мысль, предложение) - to * upon a theme развивать тему - to * on a theory расширять рамки теории уточнять, конкретизировать - he called the talks useful, but he did not * он назвал переговоры полезными, но далее это высказывание не развил - would you care to * on that statement? не уточните ли вы это заявление? elaborate вырабатывать;
    развивать ~ вырабатывать ~ детально разрабатывать ~ детально разработанный ~ замысловатый ~ подготовленный ~ продуманный ~ сложный ~ тщательно обдумывать ~ тщательно разрабатывать, разрабатывать в деталях ~ тщательно разрабатывать ~ тщательно разработанный;
    продуманный;
    выработанный;
    искусно сделанный;
    сложный;
    elaborate dinner изысканный обед ~ усложненный ~ усовершенствованный ~ уточнять ~ тщательно разработанный;
    продуманный;
    выработанный;
    искусно сделанный;
    сложный;
    elaborate dinner изысканный обед

    Большой англо-русский и русско-английский словарь > elaborate

  • 8 elaborate

    1. [ɪ'læb(ə)rɪt] прил.; = elaborative
    1)
    а) тщательно, детально разработанный; продуманный; законченный; скрупулёзный, доскональный
    б) искусно сделанный, тонкой работы; замысловатый

    elaborate pattern — изысканный узор, рисунок

    в) улучшенный, усовершенствованный
    2) старательный, аккуратный; усердный
    Syn:
    2. [ɪ'læb(ə)reɪt] гл.
    1)
    а) детально разрабатывать (тему, вопрос); конкретизировать, развивать, уточнять

    Please elaborate on this question, we need to know more. — Пожалуйста, проработайте этот вопрос подробнее, нам нужно больше данных.

    б) придавать законченный вид (теории, изобретению, произведению искусства)
    2) производить; вырабатывать, перерабатывать ( о синтезе веществ в природе); превращать, преобразовывать

    Honey is elaborated by the bee. — Мёд производят пчёлы.

    The sun, under whose influence one plant elaborates nutriment for man. — Солнце, под действием которого растение вырабатывает питание для человека.

    Англо-русский современный словарь > elaborate

  • 9 adjunctor

    adjunctor, ōris, m. [id.], one who adds, joins, or unites (used only by Cic. in strong indignation):

    ille Galliae ulterioris adjunctor, i. e. Pompey, by whose influence Gallia Transalpina was granted to Cæsar, in addition to Gallia Cisalpina,

    Cic. Att. 8, 3, 3.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adjunctor

  • 10 ἕπομαι

    ἕπομαι, only in [voice] Med., [full] ἕπομαι, [tense] impf.
    A

    εἱπόμην Il.4.274

    , al., Hdt.1.45, Th.3.10, etc., [dialect] Ep. also

    ἑπόμην Od.2.413

    , al.: [tense] fut.

    ἕψομαι Il.10.108

    , etc.: [tense] aor. 2

    ἑσπόμην 12.398

    , al., in moods without [pref] ἑ- (v. infr.), imper.

    σπεῖο 10.285

    ,

    συνεπί-σπεο Lyr.Alex.Adesp.20

    , inf.

    σπέσθαι Il.5.423

    , Od.22.324, part.

    σπόμενος Call.Hec.1.4.7

    ; in Prose in compds.,

    ἐπισπέσθαι Pl.Phdr. 248c

    ,

    ἐπι-σπόμενος Th.3.43

    , etc. (Cf. Skt. sacate 'accompany', 'follow', Lat. sequor, Lith. sèkti'follow'; ἑσπόμην ( Ἀρίσταρχος δασύνει Sch.Il.10.246) fr. ἐ-σπ-όμην, ἐ- (augm.) becoming ἑ- under the influence of ἕπομαι : ἑσπ- does not certainly occur in the moods in Hom.; when found (usu. with v.l. σπ-), it is preceded by an elided vowel, so that σπ- can be read (cf. Ptol.Asc. ap. Sch.Il.l.c.) ; Pi.O.8.11, 9.83, 10(11).78, I.5(4).36 are indecisive ( ἑσπ- only cj. in P.10.17, I.6(5).17); but ἑσποίμην occurs A.R.3.35,

    ἑσπόμενος 1.103

    , 470, 3.615, 4.434, Mosch.2.147, [tense] pres. indic.

    ἕσπεται A.R.4.1607

    , D.P.436, 1140, v.l. for ἔρχεται in Od.4.826 : [tense] pres. part.

    ἐφεσπόμενος Maiist.46

     : Skt. has a redupl. [tense] pres. stem saśc(a)-):— to be or come after, follow,
    I of Persons, whether after or in company with, abs.,

    ὁ μὲν ἦρχ', ὁ δ' ἅμ' ἕσπετο Il.11.472

     ;

    ἡγήσατο, τοὶ δ' ἅμ' ἕποντο Od.2.413

    :—Constr.: c. dat.,

    υἱέϊ σῷ Il.3.174

    , cf. 9.428, 10.108, etc.: c. acc., Pi.N.10.37 (s.v.l.), Luc.Asin.51 ;

    ἕ. ἅμα τινί Il.2.534

    , etc.;

    σοὶ γὰρ ἑψόμεσθ' ἅμα S.El. 253

     ; with ἅμα doubled,

    οἵ τοι ἅμ' αὐτῷ Ἴλιον εἰς ἅμ' ἕποντο Od.11.372

    , cf. 15.541 ; abs., v. infr. 11.2 ; less freq. ἐπ'. τινος Apollod.Ath. ap. Ath.7.281f (v. infr. 11.1);

    ἐπί τινι E.Alc. 1032

    , X.Cyr.5.2.1, etc.; ἐπὶ βασιλέα against the king, Id.An.1.4.14;

    μετά τινι Il.18.234

     ;

    μετά τινα 13.492

     ;

    μετά τινος Ar.Pl. 823

     ;

    σύν τινι Od.7.304

    , etc.;

    ὄπισθε Hdt.1.45

    , etc.
    2 follow, as attendants,

    οὐκ οἴη, ἅμα τῇ γε καὶ ἀμφίπολοι δὔ ἕποντο Od.1.331

    , cf. 8.46, etc.; also, escort, attend, by way of honour,

    θεοὶ δ' ἅμα πάντες ἕποντο Il.1.424

     ;

    νέῳ ὧδε θεοὶ πομπῆες ἕπονται Od.3.376

    .
    4 keep pace with,

    ὃς καὶ θνητὸς ἐὼν ἕπεθ' ἵπποις ἀθανάτοισι Il.16.154

    , cf. Od.6.319: metaph. of a man's limbs or strength, γούναθ' ἕποιτο, δύναμις καὶ χεῖρες ἕπονται, they do his bidding, Il.4.314, Od.20.237 ;

    ἕπεσθαι τοῖς καιροῖς τοῦ πολέμου Plu.Pomp.17

    .
    5 follow the motions of another, ὁ δ' ἑσπόμενος (better δὲ σπ.) πέσε δουρί, of one from whose body a spear is drawn, Il.12.395 ; τρυφάλεια ἅμ' ἕσπετο χειρί the helm went with his hand, i. e. came off in his hand, 3.376 ; [ἔπαλξις] ἕσπετο, i.e. the battlement came down, 12.398.
    6 follow on the track of,

    τῷ στίβῳ τῶν ἵππων X.An.7.3.43

     : abs.,

    ἕπεσθε, ὦ κύνες Id.Cyn.6.19

    .
    7 follow, obey,

    νόμῳ Hdt.5.18

    , Th.2.35;

    τῷ ξυνῷ Heraclit.2

    ;

    μηνυτῆρος φραδαῖς A.Eu. 245

     : abs., Id.Ag. 1053, Hdt.0.16; accept an invitation, X.Smp.1.7 ; ἕ. κακοῖς submit to them, S.Tr. 1074.
    8 simply, come near, approach, in imper., ἕπεο προτέρω come on nearer, Il.18.387, Od.5.91.
    10 of Time,

    παραδοῦναι τοῖς ἑπομένοις

     to succeeding generations,

    Id.Phlb. 17d

    .
    12 ἑπόμενα, τά, opp. προηγούμενα, backward points, i.e. those lying on the opposite side of the radius vector of a spiral from the direction of its motion, Archim.Spir.11 Def.6.
    b Astron., positions following in the daily movement of the heavens, eastward positions, Hipparch.1.11.5, etc.
    II of Things, as of bridal presents, ὅσσα ἔοικε φίλης ἐπὶ παιδὸς ἕπεσθαι go with her from the parent's house, Od.1.278, 2.197 (v. supr. 4 and 5).
    2 of honour, glory, etc.,

    τούτῳ.. κῦδος ἅμ' ἕψεται Il.4.415

     ; so ἄτη, τιμὴ ἕπεταί τινι, 9.512, 513,

    ἕπεται παλαιὸς ὄλβος Pi.P.5.55

     ;

    πειθὼ δ' ἕποιτο καὶ τύχη A.Supp. 523

    , etc.; ἦ οὐ γιγνώσκεις ὅ τοι ἐκ Διὸς οὐχ ἕπετ' ἀλκή; that no defence attendeth thee from Zeus, Il.8.140, cf. Pi.N.11.43, A.Ag. 854.
    3 follow upon (i.e. result from),

    τῇ ἀχαριστίᾳ ἡ ἀναισχυντία ἕ. X.Cyr. 1.2.7

    , etc.; τὰ ἑπόμενα τῆς τοιαύτης κατακοσμήσεως its consequences, Pl.Plt. 271e, cf. R. 504b; ἑπόμενος, opp. προηγούμενος, consequent (opp. antecedent), Dam.Pr. 115 ; τὰ ἑ. [μεγέθη] the consequents in a proportion, opp. ἡγούμενα, Euc.5Def.11, etc.
    4 follow suit, agree with,

    ἕπεται ὁ λόγος..Κάδμοιο κούραις Pi.O.2.22

     ; ἕπεται ἐν ἑκάστῳ μέτρον ib.13.47 ; ἑπόμενα σωφροσύνῃ things agreeing with.., Pl.Lg. 632c ; ἔργα -όμενα τῇ γραφῇ ib. 934c; τὰ τούτοις ἑ. the like to these, Id.R. 406d ; ἀναγκαῖα καὶ ἑ. ἀλλήλοις interdependent, ib. 486e ;

    τὸ πρέπον καὶ ἑπόμενον πάσῃ τῇ πολιτείᾳ Id.Lg. 835c

     ; of Nymphs, οὔτε θνητοῖς οὔτ' ἀθανάτοισιν ἕπονται they belong to.., h.Ven.259.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἕπομαι

  • 11 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 12 pesar

    m.
    1 grief (tristeza).
    3 sorrow, ruefulness, grief, woefulness.
    El pesar no se elimina tan fácilmente Sorrow is not eliminated so easily.
    4 regret, sorriness.
    v.
    1 to weigh.
    ¿cuánto pesa? how much o what does it weigh?
    El asistente pesó la mercadería The assistant weighed the goods.
    Esta bolsa pesa mucho This bag weighs a lot.
    2 to weigh up.
    3 to be heavy (ser pesado).
    pesa mucho it's very heavy
    4 to play an important part.
    en su decisión pesaron muchas razones a number of reasons influenced her decision
    * * *
    1 to weigh
    ■ ¿cuánto pesas? how much do you weigh?
    2 (tener mucho peso) to be heavy
    ■ ¡cómo pesa esta maleta! this suitcase is really heavy!
    3 (sentir) to be sorry, regret
    4 (influir) to carry weight
    1 to weigh
    1 (pena) sorrow, grief
    \
    a pesar de despite, in spite of
    a pesar de los pesares in spite of everything
    pese a que... despite the fact that..., although...
    * * *
    1. noun m.
    grief, sorrow
    2. verb
    3) grieve, cause regret
    * * *
    1. VI
    1) [objeto, persona]
    a) (=tener peso) to weigh; (Boxeo, Hípica) to weigh in at; (Inform) to be

    ¿cuánto pesas? — how much o what do you weigh?

    b) (=tener mucho peso) to be heavy

    ese paquete no pesa — that parcel isn't heavy, that parcel hardly weighs anything

    ¿pesa mucho? — is it heavy?

    ¡cómo pesa esta bolsa! — this bag's really heavy!

    ¡no pesa nada! — it's not heavy at all!

    2) (=resultar pesado)

    pesarle a algn: le pesaba la mochila — his rucksack was weighing him down

    los pies me pesan, estoy muy cansado — I'm so tired, I can hardly lift my feet up any more

    3) (=afligir)

    ¡ya le pesará! — he'll be sorry!, he'll regret this!

    me pesa haberlo hecho — I regret having done it, I'm sorry I did it

    4) (=ser una carga)

    • pesar sobre — [responsabilidad, preocupación] to weigh heavily on; [amenaza, acusación] to hang over

    5) (=influir) to carry weight
    6)

    • pese a (que) — in spite of (the fact that), despite (the fact that)

    pese a las dificultades — in spite of o despite the difficulties

    lo creo, pese a que ellos lo niegan — I believe it, even though they deny it, I believe it, in spite of o despite the fact that they deny it

    lo haré pese a quien pese — I'll do it whether people like it or not, I'll do it, no matter who I offend

    mal 2.
    7) And, CAm (=vender carne) to sell meat
    2. VT
    1) [+ carta, fruta etc] to weigh
    2) (=sopesar) to weigh up
    3.
    See:
    4. SM
    1) (=aflicción) sorrow
    2) (=arrepentimiento) regret

    sentir o tener pesar por no haber... — to regret not having...

    3)

    • a pesar de — in spite of, despite

    a pesar de todo — in spite of o despite everything

    a pesar del mal tiempo — in spite of o despite the bad weather

    • a pesar de que — even though

    a pesar de que no tiene dinero — even though he has no money, in spite of o despite the fact that he has no money

    * * *
    I
    1)
    a) (pena, tristeza) sorrow

    a pesar mío or muy a mi pesar — much to my regret

    con pesar — sorrowfully, with a heavy heart

    b) ( remordimiento) regret, remorse
    2)

    a pesar de su enfermedad/de estar enfermo — despite o in spite of being ill

    a pesar de todo — in spite of o despite everything

    a pesar de los pesares — (fam) in spite of everything

    a pesar de que no sabía mucho inglés... — despite not knowing much English...

    se lo llevó, a pesar de que yo se lo había prohibido — he took it, despite the fact that o even though I had forbidden him to

    II 1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1)
    a) paquete/maleta to be heavy

    cómo pesa! — it's terribly heavy!, it weighs a ton! (colloq)

    pesar SOBRE alguien/algo: toda la responsabilidad pesa sobre él all the responsibility falls on his shoulders o on him; la hipoteca que pesa sobre la casa — the mortgage on the house

    c) ( influir)
    2) ( causar arrepentimiento) (+ me/te/le etc)

    ya te pesará no haber estudiado — you'll be sorry you didn't study, you'll regret not studying

    3)

    pese a — despite, in spite of

    pese a todo, creo que su trabajo es el mejor — despite o in spite of everything, I still think her work is the best

    pese a quien (le) pese — no matter who I o you, etc have to upset, no matter whose toes I o you, etc have to tread on

    mal que me/le pese — whether I like/he likes it or not

    2.
    pesar vt
    a) <niño/maleta> to weigh; < manzanas> to weigh (out)
    b) ( tener cierto peso) to weigh
    3.
    pesarse v pron (refl) to weigh oneself
    * * *
    I
    1)
    a) (pena, tristeza) sorrow

    a pesar mío or muy a mi pesar — much to my regret

    con pesar — sorrowfully, with a heavy heart

    b) ( remordimiento) regret, remorse
    2)

    a pesar de su enfermedad/de estar enfermo — despite o in spite of being ill

    a pesar de todo — in spite of o despite everything

    a pesar de los pesares — (fam) in spite of everything

    a pesar de que no sabía mucho inglés... — despite not knowing much English...

    se lo llevó, a pesar de que yo se lo había prohibido — he took it, despite the fact that o even though I had forbidden him to

    II 1.
    verbo intransitivo
    1)
    a) paquete/maleta to be heavy

    cómo pesa! — it's terribly heavy!, it weighs a ton! (colloq)

    pesar SOBRE alguien/algo: toda la responsabilidad pesa sobre él all the responsibility falls on his shoulders o on him; la hipoteca que pesa sobre la casa — the mortgage on the house

    c) ( influir)
    2) ( causar arrepentimiento) (+ me/te/le etc)

    ya te pesará no haber estudiado — you'll be sorry you didn't study, you'll regret not studying

    3)

    pese a — despite, in spite of

    pese a todo, creo que su trabajo es el mejor — despite o in spite of everything, I still think her work is the best

    pese a quien (le) pese — no matter who I o you, etc have to upset, no matter whose toes I o you, etc have to tread on

    mal que me/le pese — whether I like/he likes it or not

    2.
    pesar vt
    a) <niño/maleta> to weigh; < manzanas> to weigh (out)
    b) ( tener cierto peso) to weigh
    3.
    pesarse v pron (refl) to weigh oneself
    * * *
    pesar1
    1 = grief, regret, chagrin, heartache.

    Ex: This paper discusses the ways in which books may be used to help bereaved children to understand death and other aspects of grief.

    Ex: Spalding's regret is quite understandable, for few of those seeking to identify particular editions in the catalog will fail to be confused by the results of this decision.
    Ex: Much to her nanny's surprise and chagrin, she was fully potty-trained by her first birthday.
    Ex: Lovelorn staff at a Japanese company can take paid time off after an upsetting break-up with a partner, with more ' heartache leave' offered as they get older.
    * a pesar de (que) = albeit (that), despite, in spite of, notwithstanding, although, despite the fact that, in spite of the fact that.
    * a pesar de todo = all the same, in spite of everything, despite everything, despite it all, in spite of it all, all this said.
    * a pesar de todo + Posesivo + Nombre = for all + Posesivo + Nombre.
    * con pesar = with regret.
    * muy a + Posesivo + pesar = to + Posesivo + chagrin.

    pesar2
    2 = weigh.

    Ex: Letters and parcels would be weighed by library staff and franked to show the correct amount in lieu of sticking on postage stamps.

    * pesar más que = outweigh, outbalance.

    * * *
    A
    1 (pena, tristeza) sorrow
    me expresó su pesar por la triste noticia she expressed her sorrow at the sad news
    ahoga sus pesares en el alcohol he drowns his sorrows in drink
    a pesar mío or muy a mi pesar tuve que ir much to my regret I had to go
    no debes causarle pesares a tu madre you mustn't upset your mother
    el que más pesares le causa the one who causes her the most grief o sorrow o heartache
    2 (remordimiento) regret, remorse
    no siente ningún pesar por sus malas acciones he feels no remorse for his wrongdoings, he does not regret his wrongdoings
    B
    a pesar de despite
    a pesar de su enfermedad despite his illness, despite being ill
    insistió en salir a pesar de estar enfermo he insisted on going out despite being ill o in spite of being ill
    a pesar de todo, prefiere quedarse in spite of o despite everything she prefers to stay
    a pesar de los pesares ( fam); in spite of everything
    a pesar de que no sabía mucho inglés, logró hacerse entender despite not knowing much English o although he didn't know much English, he managed to make himself understood
    se llevó el coche, a pesar de que su padre se lo había prohibido he took the car, despite the fact that o although his father had forbidden him to
    pesar2 [A1 ]
    vi
    A
    1 «paquete/maleta» to be heavy
    ¡cómo pesa tu maleta! your suitcase is terribly heavy!, your case weighs a ton! ( colloq)
    estas gafas no pesan these glasses don't weigh much, these glasses are very light
    ¿te lo llevo? — no, si no me pesa shall I carry it for you? — no, it's not heavy
    2
    (ser una carga): ya me pesan los años I feel my age now
    le pesan todas esas cargas familiares he's weighed down by all those family reponsibilities, all those family responsibilities weigh heavily on him
    pesar SOBRE algn/algo:
    toda la responsabilidad pesa sobre él all the responsibility falls on his shoulders o on him
    la hipoteca que pesa sobre la casa the mortgage on the house
    3
    (influir): su influencia sigue pesando en la región their influence continues to carry weight in the region
    en esta cuestión no deben pesar los intereses personales personal interests shouldn't come o enter into this
    ha pesado más su personalidad que su ideología her personality has been more important o more of a factor than her ideology
    argumentos que pesan a su favor arguments which weigh in his favor
    B (causar pena, arrepentimiento) (+ me/te/le etc):
    ahora me pesa haberle dicho eso now I regret saying that to him, now I'm sorry I said that to him
    ya te pesará no haber estudiado cuando seas mayor when you're older you'll be sorry you didn't study o you'll regret not studying
    me pesa haberlo ofendido I'm very sorry I offended him
    C
    pese a despite, in spite of
    pese a todo, creo que su trabajo es el mejor despite o in spite of everything, I still think her work is the best
    firmó pese a no estar de acuerdo she signed even though she did not agree
    pese a que even though
    pese a que no lo invitaron, les mandó un regalo he sent them a present even though they didn't invite him
    pese a quien (le) pese: voy a decir la verdad, pese a quien (le) pese I'm going to speak the truth, no matter who I have to upset o no matter whose toes I have to tread on
    mal que me/te/le pese like it or not
    mal que te pese, tienes que reconocer que ganó en buena ley like it or not, you have to admit he won fair and square
    mal que me pese, tendré que ponerles buena cara much as I dislike the idea I'll have to be nice to them
    ■ pesar
    vt
    1 ‹niño/maleta› to weigh; ‹manzanas› to weigh out, weigh
    es un kilo bien pesado that's a good o generous kilo
    ¿cuánto pesas? how much do you weigh?
    pesa 80 kilos he weighs 80 kilos
    ( refl) to weigh oneself
    * * *

     

    pesar 1 sustantivo masculino
    1
    a) (pena, tristeza) sorrow;

    a pesar mío or muy a mi pesar much to my regret

    2

    a pesar de todo in spite of o despite everything;
    a pesar de que even though
    pesar 2 ( conjugate pesar) verbo intransitivo
    1 [paquete/maleta] to be heavy;

    no me pesa it's not heavy
    2 ( causar arrepentimiento) (+ me/te/le etc):

    me pesa haberlo ofendido I'm very sorry I offended him
    3

    pese a que even though;
    mal que me/le pese whether I like/he likes it or not
    verbo transitivo
    a) ‹niño/maleta› to weigh;

    ‹ manzanas› to weigh (out)


    pesarse verbo pronominal ( refl) to weigh oneself
    pesar
    I verbo intransitivo
    1 (tener peso físico) to weigh: esa carne pesa dos kilos, that meat weighs two kilos
    2 (tener peso psíquico) to have influence: sus opiniones aún pesan en el grupo, his opinions still carry weight in the group
    3 (causar arrepentimiento, dolor) to grieve: me pesa no haber ido con vosotros, I regret not having gone with you
    II vtr (determinar un peso) to weigh
    III sustantivo masculino
    1 (pena, pesadumbre) sorrow, grief
    2 (remordimiento) regret
    ♦ Locuciones: a pesar de, in spite of
    a pesar de que, although ➣ Ver nota en aunque
    ' pesar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    apencar
    - arrepentirse
    - aunque
    - disgusto
    - flema
    - todavía
    - atención
    - falta
    - hondo
    - obstante
    - sentimiento
    English:
    carry through
    - catch up
    - despite
    - destroy
    - down-to-earth
    - fact
    - for
    - intact
    - look forward to
    - manage
    - notwithstanding
    - odds
    - outweigh
    - regardless
    - regret
    - regretfully
    - ruefully
    - spite
    - stay on
    - weigh
    - while
    - deep
    - even
    - measure
    - regretful
    - reluctantly
    - sorrow
    * * *
    ♦ nm
    1. [tristeza] grief;
    todos sentimos un hondo pesar por su fallecimiento we all felt a great sorrow at his death
    2. [arrepentimiento] remorse;
    no le daba ningún pesar she felt no remorse at all
    ♦ a pesar de loc prep
    despite, in spite of;
    a pesar de las críticas in spite of o despite all the criticism;
    tuve que hacerlo a pesar mío I had to do it against my will;
    muy a nuestro pesar, hubo que invitarles we had to invite them, even though we really didn't want to;
    muy a pesar mío no puedo darte lo que me pides I can't give you what you want, much as I'd like to;
    a pesar de que… in spite of o despite the fact that…;
    a pesar de que me dolía, seguí jugando I carried on playing in spite of o despite the pain;
    a pesar de todo in spite of o despite everything;
    Fam
    a pesar de los pesares in spite of o despite everything
    ♦ vt
    1. [en balanza] to weigh;
    pésemelo, por favor could you weigh it for me, please?
    2. Fig [examinar, calibrar] to weigh up
    ♦ vi
    1. [tener peso] to weigh;
    pesa cinco kilos it weighs five kilos;
    ¿cuánto pesa? how much o what does it weigh?;
    ¡qué poco pesa! it doesn't weigh much!
    2. [ser pesado] to be heavy;
    ¡cómo o [m5] cuánto pesa! it's really heavy!;
    esta maleta no pesa nada this suitcase hardly weighs anything;
    ¡ya va pesando la edad!, ¡ya van pesando los años! I'm getting old!
    3. [recaer]
    pesa una orden de arresto sobre él there is a warrant out for his arrest;
    sobre ti pesa la decisión última the final decision rests with you
    4. [importar, influir] to play an important part;
    en su decisión pesaron muchas razones a number of reasons influenced her decision
    5. [doler, entristecer]
    me pesa tener que hacerlo I regret having to do it;
    me pesa tener que decirte esto I'm sorry to have to tell you this;
    no me pesa haber dejado ese trabajo I have no regrets about leaving that job, I'm not at all sorry I left that job
    6. Comp
    mal que te pese (whether you) like it or not
    * * *
    I v/t weigh
    II v/i
    1 ( ser muy pesado) be heavy;
    casi no pesa it weighs next to nothing
    2 ( influir) carry weight
    3 fig
    de responsabilidad weigh heavily ( sobre on);
    me pesa tener que informarle … I regret to have to inform you …;
    mal que me/le pese like it or not, whether I/you like it or not
    III m sorrow
    IV
    :
    a pesar de in spite of, despite;
    a pesar de ello nevertheless;
    a pesar de eso in spite of that, despite that;
    a pesar de que in spite of o despite the fact that, even though;
    a pesar mío against my wishes
    * * *
    pesar vt
    1) : to weigh
    2) examinar: to consider, to think over
    pesar vi
    1) : to weigh
    ¿cuánto pesa?: how much does it weigh?
    2) : to be heavy
    3) : to weigh heavily, to be a burden
    no le pesa: it's not a burden on him
    pesa sobre mi corazón: it weighs upon my heart
    4) influir: to carry weight, to have bearing
    5) (with personal pronouns) : to grieve, to sadden
    me pesa mucho: I'm very sorry
    6)
    pese a : in spite of, despite
    pesar nm
    1) aflicción, pena: sorrow, grief
    2) remordimiento: remorse
    3)
    a pesar de : in spite of, despite
    * * *
    pesar1 n
    a pesar de in spite of / despite
    pesar2 vb
    1. (en general) to weigh
    ¿cuánto pesas? how much do you weigh?
    2. (tener mucho peso) to be heavy

    Spanish-English dictionary > pesar

  • 13 ἐν

    ἐν prep. w. dat. (Hom.+). For lit. s. ἀνά and εἰς, beg. For special NT uses s. AOepke, TW II 534–39. The uses of this prep. are so many and various, and oft. so easily confused, that a strictly systematic treatment is impossible. It must suffice to list the main categories, which will help establish the usage in individual cases. The earliest auditors/readers, not being inconvenienced by grammatical and lexical debates, would readily absorb the context and experience little difficulty.
    ① marker of a position defined as being in a location, in, among (the basic idea, Rob. 586f)
    ⓐ of the space or place within which someth. is found, in: ἐν τῇ πόλει Lk 7:37. ἐν Βηθλέεμ Mt 2:1. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 3:1 (Just., D. 19, 5, cp. A I, 12, 6 ἐν ἐρημίᾳ) ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ Ac 5:42. ἐν οἴκῳ 1 Ti 3:15 and very oft. ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρός μου in my Father’s house Lk 2:49 and perh. Mt 20:15 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302, C. Ap. 1, 118 ἐν τοῖς τοῦ Διός; PTebt 12, 3; POxy 523, 3; Tob 6:11 S; Goodsp., Probs. 81–83). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ Mt 20:3. ἐν (τῷ) οὐρανῷ in heaven (Arat., Phaen. 10; Diod S 4, 61, 6; Plut., Mor. 359d τὰς ψυχὰς ἐν οὐρανῷ λάμπειν ἄστρα; Tat. 12, 2 τὰ ἄστρα τὰ ἐν αὐτῷ) Ac 2:19 (Jo 3:3); Rv 12:1; IEph 19:2.—W. quotations and accounts of the subject matter of literary works: in (Ps.-Demetr. c. 226 ὡς ἐν τῷ Εὐθυδήμῳ; Simplicius in Epict. p. 28, 37 ἐν τῷ Φαίδωνι; Ammon. Hermiae in Aristot. De Interpret. c. 9 p. 136, 20 Busse ἐν Τιμαίῳ παρειλήφαμεν=we have received as a tradition; 2 Macc 2:4; 1 Esdr 1:40; 5:48; Sir 50:27; Just., A I, 60, 1 ἐν τῷ παρὰ Πλάτωνι Τιμαίῳ) ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ 1 Cor 5:9. ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Lk 24:44; J 1:45. ἐν τοῖς προφήταις Ac 13:40. ἐν Ἠλίᾳ in the story of Elijah Ro 11:2 (Just., D. 120, 3 ἐν τῷ Ἰούδα). ἐν τῷ Ὡσηέ 9:25 (Just., D. 44, 2 ἐν τῷ Ἰεζεκιήλ). ἐν Δαυίδ in the Psalter ( by David is also prob.: s. 6) Hb 4:7. ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ in another prophet B 6:14. Of inner life φανεροῦσθαι ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσι be made known to (your) consciences 2 Cor 5:11. ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Mt 5:28; 13:19; 2 Cor 11:12 et al.
    ⓑ on ἐν τῷ ὄρει (X., An. 4, 3, 31; Diod S 14, 16, 2 λόφος ἐν ᾧ=a hill on which; Jos., Ant. 12, 259; Just., D. 67, 9 ἐν ὄρει Χωρήβ) J 4:20f; Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40). ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ in the market Mt 20:3. ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mt 5:25. ἐν πλαξίν on tablets 2 Cor 3:3. ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν on the street corners Mt 6:5.
    ⓒ within the range of, at, near (Soph., Fgm. 37 [34 N.2] ἐν παντὶ λίθῳ=near every stone; Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 19 ἐν Τύρῳ=near Tyre; Polyaenus 8, 24, 7 ἐν τῇ νησῖδι=near the island; Diog. L. 1, 34; 85; 97 τὰ ἐν ποσίν=what is before one’s feet; Jos., Vi. 227 ἐν Χαβωλώ) ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακείῳ (q.v.) J 8:20. ἐν τῷ Σιλωάμ near the pool of Siloam Lk 13:4. καθίζειν ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ τινος sit at someone’s right hand (cp. 1 Esdr 4:29) Eph 1:20; Hb 1:3; 8:1.
    ⓓ among, in (Hom.+; PTebt 58, 41 [111 B.C.]; Sir 16:6; 31:9; 1 Macc 4:58; 5:2; TestAbr B 9 p. 13, 27 [Stone p. 74]; Just., A I, 5, 4 ἐν βαρβάροις) ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ in the generation now living Mk 8:38. ἐν τῷ γένει μου among my people Gal 1:14 (Just., D. 51, 1 al. ἐν τῷ γένει ὑμῶν). ἐν ἡμῖν Hb 13:26. ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ in the crowd Mk 5:30 (cp. Sir 7:7). ἐν ἀλλήλοις mutually (Thu. 1, 24, 4; Just., D. 101, 3) Ro 1:12; 15:5. ἐν τοῖς ἡγεμόσιν (=among the commanding officers: Diod S 18, 61, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 21 §84) Ἰούδα Mt 2:6 et al. ἐν ἀνθρώποις among people (as Himerius, Or. 48 [14], 11; Just., A I, 23, 3, D. 64, 7) Lk 2:14; cp. Ac 4:12.
    ⓔ before, in the presence of, etc. (cp. Od. 2, 194; Eur., Andr. 359; Pla., Leg. 9, 879b; Demosth. 24, 207; Polyb. 5, 39, 6; Epict. 3, 22, 8; Appian, Maced. 18 §2 ἐν τοῖς φίλοις=in the presence of his friends; Sir 19:8; Jdth 6:2; PPetr. II, 4 [6], 16 [255/254 B.C.] δινὸν γάρ ἐστιν ἐν ὄχλῳ ἀτιμάζεσθαι=before a crowd) σοφίαν λαλοῦμεν ἐν τοῖς τελείοις in the presence of mature (i.e. spiritually sophisticated) adults 1 Cor 2:6 (cp. Simplicius in Epict. p. 131, 20 λέγειν τὰ θεωρήματα ἐν ἰδιώταις). ἐν τ. ὠσὶν ὑμῶν in your hearing Lk 4:21 (cp. Judg 17:2; 4 Km 23:2; Bar 1:3f), where the words can go linguistically just as well w. πεπλήρωται as w. ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη (this passage of scripture read in your hearing). ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς τινος in someone’s eyes, i.e. judgment (Wsd 3:2; Sir 8:16; Jdth 3:4; 12:14; 1 Macc 1:12) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:23). ἔν τινι in the same mng. as early as Trag. (Soph., Oed. C. 1213 ἐν ἐμοί=in my judgment, Ant. 925 ἐν θεοῖς καλά; also Pla., Prot. 337b; 343c) ἐν ἐμοί 1 Cor 14:11; possibly J 3:21 (s. 4c below) and Jd 1 belong here.—In the ‘forensic’ sense ἔν τινι can mean in someone’s court or forum (Soph., Ant. 459; Pla., Gorg. 464d, Leg. 11, 916b; Ael. Aristid. 38, 3 K.=7 p. 71 D.; 46 p. 283, 334 D.; Diod S 19, 51, 4; Ps.-Heraclit., Ep. 4, 6; but in several of these pass. the mng. does not go significantly beyond ‘in the presence of’ [s. above]) ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Cor 6:2 ( by you is also tenable; s. 6 below).
    ⓕ esp. to describe certain processes, inward: ἐν ἑαυτῷ to himself, i.e. in silence, διαλογίζεσθαι Mk 2:8; Lk 12:17; διαπορεῖν Ac 10:17; εἰδέναι J 6:61; λέγειν Mt 3:9; 9:21; Lk 7:49; εἰπεῖν 7:39 al.; ἐμβριμᾶσθαι J 11:38.
    ② marker of a state or condition, in
    ⓐ of being clothed and metaphors assoc. with such condition in, with (Hdt. 2, 159; X., Mem. 3, 11, 4; Diod S 1, 12, 9; Herodian 2, 13, 3; Jdth 10:3; 1 Macc 6:35; 2 Macc 3:33) ἠμφιεσμένον ἐν μαλακοῖς dressed in soft clothes Mt 11:8. περιβάλλεσθαι ἐν ἱματίοις Rv 3:5; 4:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐν ἐνδύμασι προβάτων come in sheep’s clothing Mt 7:15. περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς walk about in long robes Mk 12:38 (Tat. 2, 1 ἐν πορφυρίδι περιπατῶν); cp. Ac 10:30; Mt 11:21; Lk 10:13. ἐν λευκοῖς in white (Artem. 2, 3; 4, 2 ἐν λευκοῖς προϊέναι; Epict. 3, 22, 1) J 20:12; Hv 4, 2, 1. Prob. corresp. ἐν σαρκί clothed in flesh (cp. Diod S 1, 12, 9 deities appear ἐν ζῴων μορφαῖς) 1 Ti 3:16; 1J 4:2; 2J 7. ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὐτοῦ in all his glory Mt 6:29 (cp. 1 Macc 10:86). ἐν τ. δόξῃ τοῦ πατρός clothed in his Father’s glory 16:27; cp. 25:31; Mk 8:38; Lk 9:31.
    ⓑ of other states and conditions (so freq. w. γίνομαι, εἰμί; Attic wr.; PPetr II, 11 [1], 8 [III B.C.] γράφε, ἵνα εἰδῶμεν ἐν οἷς εἶ; 39 [g], 16; UPZ 110, 176 [164 B.C.] et al.; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 2 πάλιν ἐν ἀφθαρσίᾳ γενέσθαι; 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι; Tat. 20, 1f οὐκ ἔστι γὰρ ἄπειρος ὁ οὐρανός, … πεπερασμένος δὲ καὶ ἐν τέρματι; Mel., HE 4, 26, 6 ἐν … λεηλασίᾳ ‘plundering’): ὑπάρχων ἐν βασάνοις Lk 16:23. ἐν τῷ θανάτῳ 1J 3:14. ἐν ζωῇ Ro 5:10. ἐν τοῖς δεσμοῖς Phlm 13 (Just., A II, 2, 11 ἐν δ. γενέσθαι). ἐν πειρασμοῖς 1 Pt 1:6; ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. ἐν ὁμοιώματι σαρκός Ro 8:3. ἐν πολλῷ ἀγῶνι 1 Th 2:2. ἐν φθορᾷ in a state of corruptibility 1 Cor 15:42. ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχειν 2 Cor 10:6 (cp. PEleph 10, 7 [223/222 B.C.] τ. λοιπῶν ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ὄντων; PGen 76, 8; 3 Macc 5:8); ἐν ἐκστάσει in a state of trance Ac 11:5 (opp. Just., D, 115, 3 ἐν καταστάσει ὤν). Of qualities: ἐν πίστει κ. ἀγάπῃ κ. ἁγιασμῷ 1 Ti 2:15; ἐν κακίᾳ καὶ φθόνῳ Tit 3:3; ἐν πανουργίᾳ 2 Cor 4:2; ἐν εὐσεβείᾳ καὶ σεμνότητι 1 Ti 2:2; ἐν τῇ ἀνοχῇ τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:26; ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7; ἐν δόξῃ Phil 4:19.
    ③ marker of extension toward a goal that is understood to be within an area or condition, into: ἐν is somet. used w. verbs of motion where εἰς would normally be expected (Diod S 23, 8, 1 Ἄννων ἐπέρασε ἐν Σικελίᾳ; Hero I 142, 7; 182, 4; Paus. 7, 4, 3 διαβάντες ἐν τῇ Σάμῳ; Epict. 1, 11, 32; 2, 20, 33; Aelian, VH 4, 18; Vett. Val. 210, 26; 212, 6 al., s. index; Pel.-Leg. 1, 4; 5; 2, 1; PParis 10, 2 [145 B.C.] ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἐν Ἀλεξανδρείᾳ; POxy 294, 4; BGU 22, 13; Tob 5:5 BA; 1 Macc 10:43; TestAbr B 2 p. 106, 23=Stone p. 60 [s. on the LXX Thackeray 25]; πέμψον αὐτοὺς ἐν πολέμῳ En 10:9; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 22 [Stone p. 14] δάκρυα … ἐν τῷ νιπτῆρι πίπτοντα): εἰσέρχεσθαι Lk 9:46; Rv 11:11; ἀπάγειν GJs 6:1; ἀνάγειν 7:1; εἰσάγειν 10:1; καταβαίνειν J 5:3 (4) v.l.; ἀναβαίνειν GJs 22:13; ἀπέρχεσθαι (Diod S 23, 18, 5) Hs 1:6; ἥκειν GJs 5:1; ἀποστέλλειν 25:1. To be understood otherwise: ἐξῆλθεν ὁ λόγος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ the word went out = spread in all Judaea Lk 7:17; likew. 1 Th 1:8. The metaphorical expr. ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπειθεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων turn the disobedient to the wisdom of the righteous Lk 1:17 is striking but consistent w. the basic sense of ἐν. S. also γίνομαι, δίδωμι, ἵστημι, καλέω, and τίθημι. ἐν μέσῳ among somet. answers to the question ‘whither’ (B-D-F §215, 3) Mt 10:16; Lk 10:3; 8:7.
    ④ marker of close association within a limit, in
    ⓐ fig., of pers., to indicate the state of being filled w. or gripped by someth.: in someone=in one’s innermost being ἐν αὐτῷ κατοικεῖ πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα in him dwells all the fullness Col 2:9. ἐν αὐτῷ ἐκτίσθη τὰ πάντα (prob. to be understood as local, not instrumental, since ἐν αὐ. would otherwise be identical w. διʼ αὐ. in the same vs.) everything was created in association with him 1:16 (cp. M. Ant. 4, 23 ἐν σοὶ πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; AFeuillet, NTS 12, ’65, 1–9). ἐν τῷ θεῷ κέκρυπται ἡ ζωὴ ὑμῶν your life is hid in God 3:3; cp. 2:3. Of sin in humans Ro 7:17f; cp. κατεργάζεσθαι vs. 8. Of Christ who, as a spiritual being, fills people so as to be in charge of their lives 8:10; 2 Cor 13:5, abides J 6:56, lives Gal 2:20, and takes form 4:19 in them. Of the divine word: οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1J 1:10; μένειν ἔν τινι J 5:38; ἐνοικεῖν Col 3:16. Of God’s spirit: οἰκεῖν (ἐνοικεῖν) ἔν τινι Ro 8:9, 11; 1 Cor 3:16; 2 Ti 1:14. Of spiritual gifts 1 Ti 4:14; 2 Ti 1:6. Of miraculous powers ἐνεργεῖν ἔν τινι be at work in someone Mt 14:2; Mk 6:14; ποιεῖν ἔν τινι εὐάρεστον Hb 13:21. The same expr. of God or evil spirits, who somehow work in people: 1 Cor 12:6; Phil 2:13; Eph 2:2 al.
    ⓑ of the whole, w. which the parts are closely joined: μένειν ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ remain in the vine J 15:4. ἐν ἑνὶ σώματι μέλη πολλὰ ἔχομεν in one body we have many members Ro 12:4. κρέμασθαι ἔν τινι depend on someth. Mt 22:40.
    ⓒ esp. in Paul. or Joh. usage, to designate a close personal relation in which the referent of the ἐν-term is viewed as the controlling influence: under the control of, under the influence of, in close association with (cp. ἐν τῷ Δαυιδ εἰμί 2 Km 19:44): of Christ εἶναι, μένειν ἐν τῷ πατρί (ἐν τῷ θεῷ) J 10:38; 14:10f (difft. CGordon, ‘In’ of Predication or Equivalence: JBL 100, ’81, 612f); and of Christians 1J 3:24; 4:13, 15f; be or abide in Christ J 14:20; 15:4f; μένειν ἐν τῷ υἱῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πατρί 1J 2:24. ἔργα ἐν θεῷ εἰργασμένα done in communion with God J 3:21 (but s. 1e above).—In Paul the relation of the individual to Christ is very oft. expressed by such phrases as ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν κυρίῳ etc., also vice versa (FNeugebauer, NTS 4, ’57/58, 124–38; AWedderburn, JSNT 25, ’85, 83–97) ἐν ἐμοὶ Χριστός Gal 2:20, but here in the sense of a above.—See, e.g., Dssm., D. ntl. Formel ‘in Christo Jesu’ 1892; EWeber, D. Formel ‘in Chr. Jesu’ u. d. paul. Christusmystik: NKZ 31, 1920, 213ff; LBrun, Zur Formel ‘in Chr. Jesus’ im Phil: Symbolae Arctoae 1, 1922, 19–37; MHansen, Omkring Paulus-Formeln ‘i Kristus’: TK 4/10, 1929, 135–59; HBöhlig, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 170–75; OSchmitz, D. Christusgemeinschaft d. Pls2 ’56; AWikenhauser, D. Christusmystik d. Pls2 ’56; KMittring, Heilswirklichkeit b. Pls; Beitrag z. Verständnis der unio cum Christo in d. Plsbriefen 1929; ASchweitzer, D. Mystik d. Ap. Pls 1930 (Eng. tr., WMontgomery, The Myst. of Paul the Ap., ’31); WSchmauch, In Christus ’35; BEaston, Pastoral Ep. ’47, 210f; FBüchsel, ‘In Chr.’ b. Pls: ZNW 42, ’49, 141–58. Also HKorn, D. Nachwirkungen d. Christusmystik d. Pls in den Apost. Vätern, diss. Berlin 1928; EAndrews, Interpretation 6, ’52, 162–77; H-LParisius, ZNW 49, ’58, 285–88 (10 ‘forensic’ passages); JAllan, NTS 5, ’58/59, 54–62 (Eph), ibid. 10, ’63, 115–21 (pastorals); FNeugebauer, In Christus, etc. ’61; MDahl, The Resurrection of the Body ( 1 Cor 15) ’62, 110–13.—Paul has the most varied expressions for this new life-principle: life in Christ Ro 6:11, 23; love in Christ 8:39; grace, which is given in Christ 1 Cor 1:4; freedom in Chr. Gal 2:4; blessing in Chr. 3:14; unity in Chr. vs. 28. στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ stand firm in the Lord Phil 4:1; εὑρεθῆναι ἐν Χ. be found in Christ 3:9; εἶναι ἐν Χ. 1 Cor 1:30; οἱ ἐν Χ. Ro 8:1.—1 Pt 5:14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χ., ἀποθνῄσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 15:18.—Rv 14:13; ζῳοποιεῖσθαι 1 Cor 15:22.—The formula is esp. common w. verbs that denote a conviction, hope, etc. πεποιθέναι Gal 5:10; Phil 1:14; 2 Th 3:4. παρρησίαν ἔχειν Phlm 8. πέπεισμαι Ro 14:14. ἐλπίζειν Phil 2:19. καύχησιν ἔχειν Ro 15:17; 1 Cor 15:31. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. λαλεῖν 2 Cor 2:17; 12:19. ἀλήθειαν λέγειν Ro 9:1. λέγειν καὶ μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. But also apart fr. such verbs, in numerous pass. it is used w. verbs and nouns of the most varied sort, often without special emphasis, to indicate the scope within which someth. takes place or has taken place, or to designate someth. as being in close assoc. w. Christ, and can be rendered, variously, in connection with, in intimate association with, keeping in mind ἁγιάζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:2, or ἅγιος ἐν Χ. Phil 1:1; ἀσπάζεσθαί τινα 1 Cor 16:19. δικαιοῦσθαι Gal 2:17. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12. παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 4:1. προσδέχεσθαί τινα Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. χαίρειν 3:1; 4:4, 10. γαμηθῆναι ἐν κυρίῳ marry in the Lord=marry a Christian 1 Cor 7:39. προϊστάμενοι ὑμῶν ἐν κυρίῳ your Christian leaders (in the church) 1 Th 5:12 (but s. προί̈στημι 1 and 2).—εὐάρεστος Col 3:20. νήπιος 1 Cor 3:1. φρόνιμος 4:10. παιδαγωγοί vs. 15. ὁδοί vs. 17. Hence used in periphrasis for ‘Christian’ οἱ ὄντες ἐν κυρίῳ Ro 16:11; ἄνθρωπος ἐν Χ. 2 Cor 12:2; αἱ ἐκκλησίαι αἱ ἐν Χ. Gal 1:22; 1 Th 2:14; νεκροὶ ἐν Χ. 4:16; ἐκλεκτός Ro 16:13. δόκιμος vs. 10. δέσμιος Eph 4:1. πιστὸς διάκονος 6:21; ἐν Χ. γεννᾶν τινα become someone’s parent in the Christian life 1 Cor 4:15. τὸ ἔργον μου ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κυρίῳ 9:1.—The use of ἐν πνεύματι as a formulaic expression is sim.: ἐν πν. εἶναι be under the impulsion of the spirit, i.e. the new self, as opposed to ἐν σαρκί under the domination of the old self Ro 8:9; cp. ἐν νόμῳ 2:12. λαλεῖν speak under divine inspiration 1 Cor 12:3. ἐγενόμην ἐν πνεύματι I was in a state of inspiration Rv 1:10; 4:2; opp. ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος came to himself Ac 12:11 (cp. X., An. 1, 5, 17 et al.).—The expr. ἐν πν. εἶναι is also used to express the idea that someone is under the special infl. of a good or even an undesirable spirit: Mt 22:43; Mk 12:36; Lk 2:27; 1 Cor 12:3; Rv 17:3; 21:10. ἄνθρωπος ἐν πν. ἀκαθάρτῳ (ὤν) Mk 1:23 (s. GBjörck, ConNeot 7, ’42, 1–3).—ἐν τῷ πονηρῷ κεῖσθαι be in the power of the evil one 1J 5:19. οἱ ἐν νόμῳ those who are subject to the law Ro 3:19. ἐν τῷ Ἀδὰμ ἀποθνῄσκειν die because of a connection w. Adam 1 Cor 15:22.—On the formula ἐν ὀνόματι (Χριστοῦ) s. ὄνομα 1, esp. dγג. The OT is the source of the expr. ὀμνύναι ἔν τινι swear by someone or someth. (oft. LXX) Mt 5:34ff; 23:16, 18ff; Rv 10:6; παραγγέλλομέν σοι ἐν Ἰησοῦ Ac 19:14 v.l. The usage in ὁμολογεῖν ἔν τινι acknowledge someone Mt 10:32; Lk 12:8 (s. ὁμολογέω 4b) is Aramaic.
    ⑤ marker introducing means or instrument, with, a construction that begins w. Homer (many examples of instrumental ἐν in Radermacher’s edition of Ps.-Demetr., Eloc. p. 100; Reader, Polemo p. 258) but whose wide currency in our lit. is partly caused by the infl. of the LXX, and its similarity to the Hebr. constr. w. בְּ (B-D-F §219; Mlt. 104; Mlt-H. 463f; s. esp. M-M p. 210).
    ⓐ it can serve to introduce persons or things that accompany someone to secure an objective: ‘along with’
    α. pers., esp. of a military force, w. blending of associative (s. 4) and instrumental idea (1 Macc 1:17; 7:14, 28 al.): ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ὑπαντῆσαι meet, w. 10,000 men Lk 14:31 (cp. 1 Macc 4:6, 29 συνήντησεν αὐτοῖς Ἰούδας ἐν δέκα χιλιάσιν ἀνδρῶν). ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσιν αὐτοῦ Jd 14 (cp. Jdth 16:3 ἦλθεν ἐν μυριάσι δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ).
    β. impers. (oft. LXX; PTebt 41, 5 [c. 119 B.C.]; 16, 14 [114 B.C.]; 45, 17 al., where people rush into the village or the house ἐν μαχαίρῃ, ἐν ὅπλοις). (Just., D. 86, 6 τῆς ἀξίνης, ἐν ἧ πεπορευμένοι ἦσαν … κόψαι ξύλα) ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔρχεσθαι come with a stick (as a means of discipline) 1 Cor 4:21 (cp. Lucian, Dial. Mort. 23, 3 Ἑρμῆν καθικόμενον ἐν τῇ ῥάβδῳ; Gen 32:11; 1 Km 17:43; 1 Ch 11:23; Dssm., B 115f [BS 120]). ἐν πληρώματι εὐλογίας with the full blessing Ro 15:29. ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ Mt 16:28. ἐν αἵματι Hb 9:25 (cp. Mi 6:6). ἐν τῷ ὕδατι καὶ ἐν τῷ αἵματι 1J 5:6. ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει τοῦ Ἠλίου equipped w. the spirit and power of Elijah Lk 1:17. φθάνειν ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ come with the preaching of the gospel 2 Cor 10:14. μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ not burdened w. old leaven 1 Cor 5:8.
    ⓑ it can serve to express means or instrumentality in terms of location for a specific action (cp. TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 5f [Stone p. 30] κρατῶν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ζυγόν; Tat. 9, 2 οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεσσοῖς ἀθύροντες ‘those who play w. gaming pieces’ [as, e.g., in backgammon]): κατακαίειν ἐν πυρί Rv 17:16 (cp. Bar 1:2; 1 Esdr 1:52; 1 Macc 5:5 al.; as early as Il. 24, 38; cp. POxy 2747, 74; Aelian, HA 14, 15. Further, the ἐν Rv 17:16 is not textually certain). ἐν ἅλατι ἁλίζειν, ἀρτύειν Mt 5:13; Mk 9:50; Lk 14:34 (s. M-M p. 210; WHutton, ET 58, ’46/47, 166–68). ἐν τῷ αἵματι λευκαίνειν Rv 7:14. ἐν αἵματι καθαρίζειν Hb 9:22. ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ ἀποκτείνειν kill with the sword Rv 6:8 (1 Esdr 1:50; 1 Macc 2:9; cp. 3:3; Jdth 16:4; ἀπολεῖ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ En 99:16; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] ἐν ῥ. πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ; cp. Lucian, Hist. Conscrib. 12 ἐν ἀκοντίῳ φονεύειν). ἐν μαχαίρῃ πατάσσειν Lk 22:49 (διχοτομήσατε … ἐν μ. GrBar 16:3); ἐν μ. ἀπόλλυσθαι perish by the sword Mt 26:52. ποιμαίνειν ἐν ῥάβδῳ σιδηρᾷ Rv 2:27; 12:5; 19:15 (s. ποιμαίνω 2aγ and cp. PGM 36, 109). καταπατεῖν τι ἐν τοῖς ποσίν tread someth. w. the feet Mt 7:6 (cp. Sir 38:29). δύο λαοὺς βλέπω ἐν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς μου I see two peoples with my eyes GJs 17:2 (ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν ὀρᾶν=see with the eyes: cp. Il. 1, 587; Od. 8, 459; Callinus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 1, 20 Diehl2). ποιεῖν κράτος ἐν βραχίονι do a mighty deed w. one’s arm Lk 1:51 (cp. Sir 38:30); cp. 11:20. δικαιοῦσθαι ἐν τῷ αἵματι be justified by the blood Ro 5:9. ἐν ἁγιασμῷ πνεύματος 2 Th 2:13; 1 Pt 1:2; ἐν τ. παρακλήσει 2 Cor 7:7. εὐλογεῖν ἐν εὐλογίᾳ Eph 1:3. λαλοῦντες ἑαυτοῖς ἐν ψάλμοις 5:19. ἀσπάσασθαι … ἐν εὐχῇ greet w. prayer GJs 24:1. Of intellectual process γινώσκειν ἔν τινι know or recognize by someth. (cp. Thuc. 7, 11, 1 ἐν ἐπιστολαῖς ἴστε; Sir 4:24; 11:28; 26:29) J 13:35; 1J 3:19; cp. ἐν τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου in the breaking of bread Lk 24:35 (s. 10c).—The ἐν which takes the place of the gen. of price is also instrumental ἠγόρασας ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου Rv 5:9 (cp. 1 Ch 21:24 ἀγοράζω ἐν ἀργυρίῳ).—ἐν ᾧ whereby Ro 14:21.—The idiom ἀλλάσσειν, μεταλλάσσειν τι ἔν τινι exchange someth. for someth. else Ro 1:23, 25 (cp. Ps 105:20) is not un-Greek (Soph., Ant. 945 Danaë had to οὐράνιον φῶς ἀλλάξαι ἐν χαλκοδέτοις αὐλαῖς=change the heavenly light for brass-bound chambers).
    ⑥ marker of agency: with the help of (Diod S 19, 46, 4 ἐν τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ συνεδρίου=with the help of the members of the council; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 7, 9 p. 259, 31 ἐν ἐκείνῳ ἑαλωκότες) ἐν τῷ ἄρχοντι τ. δαιμονίων ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια Mt 9:34. ἐν ἑτερογλώσσοις λαλεῖν 1 Cor 14:21. κρίνειν τ. οἰκουμένην ἐν ἀνδρί Ac 17:31 (cp. SIG2 850, 8 [173/172 B.C.] κριθέντω ἐν ἄνδροις τρίοις; Synes., Ep. 91 p. 231b ἐν ἀνδρί); perh. 1 Cor 6:2 (s. 1e); ἀπολύτρωσις ἐν Χρ. redemption through Christ Ro 3:24 (cp. ἐν αὐτῷ σωθήσεσθε Just., A I, 60, 3).
    ⑦ marker of circumstance or condition under which someth. takes place: ἐν ᾧ κρίνεις Ro 2:1 (but s. B-D-F §219, 2); ἐν ᾧ δοκιμάζει 14:22; ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 2 Cor 11:12; ἐν ᾧ τις τολμᾷ 11:21; ἐν ᾧ καταλαλοῦσιν whereas they slander 1 Pt 2:12, cp. 3:16 (on these Petrine pass. s. also ὅς 1k); ἐν ᾧ ξενίζονται in view of your changed attitude they consider it odd 4:4. ἐν ᾧ in 3:19 may similarly refer to a changed circumstance, i.e. from death to life (WDalton, Christ’s Proclamation to the Spirits, ’65, esp. 135–42: ‘in this sphere, under this influence’ [of the spirit]). Other possibilities: as far as this is concerned: πνεῦμα• ἐν ᾧ spirit; as which (FZimmermann, APF 11, ’35, 174 ‘meanwhile’ [indessen]; BReicke, The Disobedient Spirits and Christian Baptism, ’46, 108–15: ‘on that occasion’=when he died).—Before a substantive inf. (oft. LXX; s. KHuber, Unters. über den Sprachchar. des griech. Lev., diss. Zürich 1916, 83): in that w. pres. inf. (POxy 743, 35 [2 B.C.] ἐν τῷ δέ με περισπᾶσθαι οὐκ ἠδυνάσθην συντυχεῖν Ἀπολλωνίῳ; Just., D. 10, 3 ἐν τῷ μήτε σάββατα τηρεῖν μήτε …) βασανιζομένους ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν as they were having rough going in the waves=having a difficult time making headway Mk 6:48. ἐθαύμαζον ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν … αὐτόν they marveled over his delay Lk 1:21. ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρα ἐκτείνειν σε in that you extend your hand Ac 4:30; cp. 3:26; Hb 8:13. W. aor. inf. ἐν τῷ ὑποτάξαι αὐτῷ τὰ πάντα Hb 2:8. Somet. the circumstantial and temporal (s. 7 and 10) uses are so intermingled that it is difficult to decide between them; so in some of the pass. cited above, and also Hv 1, 1, 8 et al. (B-D-F §404, 3; Rob. 1073).—WHutton, Considerations for the Translation of ἐν, Bible Translator 9, ’58, 163–70; response by NTurner, ibid. 10, ’59, 113–20.—On ἐν w. article and inf. s. ISoisalon-Soininen, Die Infinitive in der LXX, ’65, 80ff.
    ⑧ marker denoting the object to which someth. happens or in which someth. shows itself, or by which someth. is recognized, to, by, in connection with: ζητεῖν τι ἔν τινι require someth. in the case of someone 1 Cor 4:2; cp. ἐν ἡμῖν μάθητε so that you might learn in connection w. us vs. 6. Cp. Phil 1:30. ἵνα οὕτως γένηται ἐν ἐμοί that this may be done in my case 1 Cor 9:15 (Just., D. 77, 3 τοῦτο γενόμενον ἐν τῷ ἡμετέρῳ Χριστῷ). ἐδόξαζον ἐν ἐμοὶ τὸν θεόν perh. they glorified God in my case Gal 1:24, though because of me and for me are also possible. μήτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ἀνεκεφαλαιώθη ἡ ἱστορία GJs 13:1 (s. ἀνακεφαλαιόω 1). ποιεῖν τι ἔν τινι do someth. to (with) someone (Epict., Ench. 33, 12; Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 18 μὴ ἑτεροῖόν τι ποιήσῃς ἐν ἐμοί; Gen 40:14; Jdth 7:24; 1 Macc 7:23) Mt 17:12; Lk 23:31. ἐργάζεσθαί τι ἔν τινι Mk 14:6. ἔχειν τι ἔν τινι have someth. in someone J 3:15 (but ἐν αὐτῷ is oft. constr. w. πιστεύων, cp. v.l.); cp. 14:30 (s. BNoack, Satanas u. Soteria ’48, 92). ἵνα δικαιοσύνης ναὸν ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ σώματι ἀναδείξῃ AcPlCor 2:17 (s. ἀναδείκνυμι 1).—For the ordinary dat. (Diod S 3, 51, 4 ἐν ἀψύχῳ ἀδύνατον=it is impossible for a lifeless thing; Ael. Aristid. 49, 15 K.=25 p. 492 D.: ἐν Νηρίτῳ θαυμαστὰ ἐνεδείξατο=[God] showed wonderful things to N.; 53 p. 629 D.: οὐ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς βελτίστοις εἰσὶ παῖδες, ἐν δὲ πονηροτάτοις οὐκέτι=it is not the case that the very good have children, and the very bad have none [datives of possession]; 54 p. 653 D.: ἐν τ. φαύλοις θετέον=to the bad; EpJer 66 ἐν ἔθνεσιν; Aesop, Fab. 19, 8 and 348a, 5 v.l. Ch.) ἀποκαλύψαι τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἐμοί Gal 1:16. φανερόν ἐστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς Ro 1:19 (Aesop 15c, 11 Ch. τ. φανερὸν ἐν πᾶσιν=evident to all). ἐν ἐμοὶ βάρβαρος (corresp. to τῷ λαλοῦντι βάρβ.) 1 Cor 14:11 (Amphis Com. [IV B.C.] 21 μάταιός ἐστιν ἐν ἐμοί). δεδομένον ἐν ἀνθρώποις Ac 4:12. θεῷ … ἐν ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:14.—Esp. w. verbs of striking against: προσκόπτω, πταίω, σκανδαλίζομαι; s. these entries.
    ⑨ marker of cause or reason, because of, on account of (PParis 28, 13=UPZ 48, 12f [162/161 B.C.] διαλυόμενοι ἐν τῷ λιμῷ; Ps 30:11; 1 Macc 16:3 ἐν τῷ ἐλέει; 2 Macc 7:29; Sir 33:17)
    ⓐ gener. ἁγιάζεσθαι ἔν τινι Hb 10:10; 1 Cor 7:14. ἐν τ. ἐπιθυμίαις τῶν καρδιῶν Ro 1:24; perh. ἐν Ἰσαὰκ κληθήσεταί σοι σπέρμα 9:7; Hb 11:18 (both Gen 21:12). ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ αὐτῶν because of their many words Mt 6:7. ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύομεν this is the reason why we believe J 16:30; cp. Ac 24:16; 1 Cor 4:4 (Just., D. 68, 7 οὐχὶ καὶ ἐν τούτῳ δυσωπήσω ὑμᾶς μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς διδασκάλοις ὑμῶν=‘surely you will be convinced by this [argument] to lose confidence in your teachers, won’t you?’); perh. 2 Cor 5:2. Sim., of the occasion: ἔφυγεν ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ at this statement Ac 7:29; cp. 8:6. W. attraction ἐν ᾧ = ἐν τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that = because Ro 8:3; Hb 2:18; 6:17.
    ⓑ w. verbs that express feeling or emotion, to denote that toward which the feeling is directed; so: εὐδοκεῖν (εὐδοκία), εὐφραίνεσθαι, καυχᾶσθαι, χαίρειν et al.
    ⑩ marker of a period of time, in, while, when
    ⓐ indicating an occurrence or action within which, at a certain point, someth. occurs Mt 2:1. ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 3:1. ἐν τῷ ἑξῆς afterward Lk 7:11. ἐν τῷ μεταξύ meanwhile (PTebt 72, 190; PFlor 36, 5) J 4:31. in the course of, within ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις (X., Ages. 1, 34; Diod S 13, 14, 2; 20, 83, 4; Arrian, Anab. 4, 6, 4 ἐν τρισὶν ἡμέραις; Aelian, VH 1, 6; IPriene 9, 29; GDI 1222, 4 [Arcadia] ἰν ἁμέραις τρισί; EpArist 24; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1:3 Jac.) Mt 27:40; J 2:19f.
    ⓑ point of time when someth. occurs ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως Mt 11:22 (En 10:6; Just., D. 38, 2; Tat. 12, 4). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ J 6:44; 11:24; 12:48; cp. 7:37. ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ Mt 8:13; 10:19; cp. 7:22; J 4:53. ἐν σαββάτῳ 12:2; J 7:23. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ J 11:9 (opp. ἐν τῇ νυκτί vs. 10). ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ on the second visit Ac 7:13. ἐν τῇ παλιγγενεσίᾳ in the new age Mt 19:28. ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ 1 Cor 15:23; 1 Th 2:19; 3:13; Phil 2:12 (here, in contrast to the other pass., there is no reference to the second coming of Christ.—Just., D. 31, 1 ἐν τῇ ἐνδόξῳ γινομένῃ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ; 35, 8; 54, 1 al.); 1J 2:28. ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει in the resurrection Mt 22:28; Mk 12:23; Lk 14:14; 20:33; J 11:24 (Just., D. 45, 2 ἐν τῇ τῶν νεκρῶν ἀναστάσει). ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ σάλπιγγι at the last trumpet-call 1 Cor 15:52. ἐν τῇ ἀποκαλύψει at the appearance of Jesus/Christ (in the last days) 2 Th 1:7; 1 Pt 1:7, 13; 4:13.
    ⓒ to introduce an activity whose time is given when, while, during (Diod S 23, 12, 1 ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις=in the case of this kind of behavior) ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ when (you) pray Mt 21:22. ἐν τῇ στάσει during the revolt Mk 15:7. ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ in the course of his teaching Mk 4:2; 12:38. If Lk 24:35 belongs here, the sense would be on the occasion of, when (but s. 5b). ἐν αὐτῷ in it (the preaching of the gospel) Eph 6:20. γρηγοροῦντες ἐν αὐτῇ (τῇ προσευχῇ) while you are watchful in it Col 4:2. Esp. w. the pres. inf. used substantively: ἐν τῷ σπείρειν while (he) sowed Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; cp. 6:48 (s. 7 above and βασανίζω); ἐν τῷ καθεύδειν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους while people were asleep Mt 13:25; ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτόν during the accusations against him 27:12. W. the aor. inf. the meaning is likewise when. Owing to the fundamental significance of the aor. the action is the focal point (s. Rob. 1073, opp. B-D-F §404) ἐν τῷ γενέσθαι τὴν φωνήν Lk 9:36. ἐν τῷ ἐπανελθεῖν αὐτόν 19:15. ἐν τῷ εἰσελθεῖν αὐτούς 9:34.—W. ἐν ᾦ while, as long as (Soph., Trach. 929; Cleanthes [IV/III B.C.] Stoic. I p. 135, 1 [Diog. L. 7, 171]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 11 Jac.; Plut., Mor. 356c; Arrian, Anab. 6, 12, 1; Pamprepios of Panopolis [V A.D.] 1, 22 [ed. HGerstinger, SBWienAk 208/3, 1928]) Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34; 24:44 D; J 5:7.
    ⑪ marker denoting kind and manner, esp. functioning as an auxiliary in periphrasis for adverbs (Kühner-G. I 466): ἐν δυνάμει w. power, powerfully Mk 9:1; Ro 1:4; Col 1:29; 2 Th 1:11; ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ justly Ac 17:31; Rv 19:11 (cp. Just., A II, 4, 3 and D. 16, 3; 19, 2 ἐν δίκῃ). ἐν χαρᾷ joyfully Ro 15:32. ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ earnestly Ac 26:7. ἐν σπουδῇ zealously Ro 12:8. ἐν χάριτι graciously Gal 1:6; 2 Th 2:16. ἐν (πάσῃ) παρρησίᾳ freely, openly J 7:4; 16:29; Phil 1:20. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ Ac 5:23. ἐν τάχει (PHib 47, 35 [256 B.C.] ἀπόστειλον ἐν τάχει) Lk 18:8; Ro 16:20; Rv 1:1; 22:6. ἐν μυστηρίῳ 1 Cor 2:7 (belongs prob. not to σοφία, but to λαλοῦμεν: in the form of a secret; cp. Polyb. 23, 3, 4; 26, 7, 5; Just., D. 63, 2 Μωυσῆς … ἐν παραβολῇ λέγων; 68, 6 εἰρήμενον … ἐν μυστηρίῳ; Diod S 17, 8, 5 ἐν δωρεαῖς λαβόντες=as gifts; 2 Macc 4:30 ἐν δωρεᾷ=as a gift; Sir 26:3; Polyb. 28, 17, 9 λαμβάνειν τι ἐν φερνῇ). Of the norm: ἐν μέτρῳ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου μέρους acc. to the measure of each individual part Eph 4:16. On 1 Cor 1:21 s. AWedderburn, ZNW 64, ’73, 132–34.
    ⑫ marker of specification or substance: w. adj. πλούσιος ἐν ἐλέει Eph 2:4; cp. Tit 2:3; Js 1:8.—of substance consisting in (BGU 72, 11 [191 A.D.] ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε) τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν Eph 2:15. ἐν μηδενὶ λειπόμενοι Js 1:4 (contrast Just., A I, 67, 6 τοῖς ἐν χρείᾳ οὖσι). Hb 13:21a.— amounting to (BGU 970, 14=Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 242, 14f [177 A.D.] προσηνενκάμην αὐτῷ προοῖκα ἐν δραχμαῖς ἐννακοσίαις) πᾶσαν τὴν συγγένειαν ἐν ψυχαῖς ἑβδομήκοντα πέντε Ac 7:14.—Very rarely for the genitive (Philo Mech. 75, 29 τὸ ἐν τῷ κυλίνδρῳ κοίλασμα; EpArist 31 ἡ ἐν αὐτοῖς θεωρία = ἡ αὐτῶν θ.; cp. 29; Tat. 18, 1 πᾶν τὸ ἐν αὐτῇ εἶδος) ἡ δωρεὰ ἐν χάριτι the free gift in beneficence or grace Ro 5:15.—DELG. LfgrE s.v. ἐν col. 569 (lit. esp. early Greek). M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐν

  • 14 być

    impf (jestem, jesteś, jest, jesteśmy, jesteście, są, byłem, byłeś, był, byliśmy, byliście, byli, będę, będziesz, będzie, będziemy, będziecie, będą) Ⅰ vi 1. (istnieć, żyć) to be
    - jest wielu znanych aktorów there are many well known actors
    - nie ma nikogo, kto mógłby to zrobić there’s no one who could do it
    - czy jest Bóg, czy go nie ma? does God exist, or not?
    - był sobie kiedyś stary król there was a. lived once an old king
    - nie było cię jeszcze wtedy na świecie this was before you were born
    - kiedy mnie już z wami nie będzie euf. when I am no more a. I am no longer with you euf.
    - myślę, więc jestem I think, therefore I am
    - być albo nie być to be or not to be
    - to dla nas być albo nie być this is our to be or not to be, this is our Waterloo
    - nie ma już dla niej ratunku nothing can save her now
    - jest wiele powodów do zadowolenia there’s good reason to be happy
    - nie ma obaw a. strachu pot. ! no problem! pot., not to worry! pot.
    - nie ma powodu do obaw there is no reason a. need to worry
    - są sprawy, których nigdy nie zrozumiesz there are (certain) things that you’ll never understand
    - nie ma co płakać/gadać it’s no use crying/talking (about it)
    - nie ma co żałować (there’s) no need to be sorry
    - nie ma co a. czego żałować it’s no great loss
    - nie ma czemu się dziwić, że… it’s no surprise a. wonder that…
    - nie ma o co się kłócić there’s nothing to quarrel about
    - nie ma czym się martwić/czego się bać there’s nothing to worry about/to be afraid of
    - nie ma z czego być dumnym (it’s) nothing to be proud of
    - nie ma z czego się cieszyć/śmiać there’s nothing to rejoice/to laugh about
    - „dziękuję za podwiezienie” – „nie ma za co” ‘thanks for the lift’ – ‘don’t mention it’ a. ‘you’re welcome‘
    - „przepraszam, że panu przerwałem” – „nie ma za co” ‘sorry I interrupted you’ – ‘that’s all right’
    - już cię/was nie ma! off with you!
    2. (przebywać, znajdować się) to be
    - być w pracy/szkole to be at work/at school
    - być w teatrze/na koncercie to be at the theatre/at a concert
    - teraz wychodzę, ale będę w domu o piątej I’m going out now, but I’ll be home at five
    - dzisiaj nie ma go w biurze he’s not in the office today
    - w pokoju nikogo nie ma/nie było there is/was no-one in the room
    - jest już piąta, a jego jak nie ma, tak nie ma it’s already five, and he’s still not here a. there’s still no trace of him
    - „czy jest Robert?” – „nie, nie ma go, jest jeszcze w szkole” ‘is Robert in?’ – ‘no, he’s not, he’s still at school’
    - „są jeszcze bilety na ostatni seans?” – „niestety, już nie ma” ‘do you still have tickets for the last showing?’ – ‘sorry, all sold out’
    - czy będziesz jutro w domu? ‘will you be at home a. in home tomorrow?’
    - kiedy (ona) będzie znowu w Warszawie? when will she be in Warsaw again?
    - byłem wczoraj u Roberta/u babci I was at Robert’s/granny’s yesterday, I went to see Robert/granny yesterday
    - był przy narodzinach swojej córki he was present at the birth of his daughter
    - nigdy nie byłem w Rosji I’ve never been to Russia
    - „skąd jesteś?” – „(jestem) z Krakowa/Polski” ‘where are you from?’ – ‘(I’m) from Cracow/Poland’
    - „gdzie jesteś?” – „tutaj!” ‘where are you?’ – ‘(I’m) here!’
    - „jestem!” (przy odczytywaniu listy) ‘here!’, ‘present’
    - będąc w Londynie, odwiedziłem Annę when a. while I was in London I went to see Anna
    - biblioteka jest w budynku głównym the library is in the main building
    - w jednym pudełku jest dziesięć bateryjek there are ten batteries in a packet
    - w domu nie było nic do jedzenia there was nothing to eat at home a. in the house
    - co jest w tym pudle? what’s in this box?
    - gdzie jest moja książka/najbliższa apteka? where’s my book/the nearest chemist’s?
    - co jest dzisiaj na lunch? what’s for lunch today?
    - wczoraj na kolację był dorsz there was cod for dinner yesterday
    - „dużo masz tych ziemniaków?” – „oj, będzie” pot. ‘got a lot of those spuds?’ – ‘loads’ pot.
    - będzie, będzie, więcej się nie zmieści pot. that’s plenty a. that’ll do, there’s no room for any more
    3. (trwać, stawać się) to be
    - jest godzina druga po południu it’s two in the afternoon a. two p.m.
    - nie ma jeszcze szóstej rano it’s not yet six a.m.
    - zanim dotrzemy do domu, będzie ósma wieczorem/północ it’ll be eight p.m./midnight by the time we reach home
    - był maj it was in May
    - to było w grudniu 1999 it was in December 1999
    - to było dawno, dawno temu this was a long, long time ago
    - jest piękny ranek it’s a fine morning
    - jest mroźno/upalnie it’s nippy/hot
    - wczoraj był deszcz/mróz it was raining/freezing yesterday
    - ciekawe, czy jutro będzie pogoda I wonder if it’s going to be fine tomorrow
    - nie pamiętam dokładnie, to było dość dawno temu I can’t really remember, it was some time ago
    - z niego jeszcze coś będzie he’ll turn out all right
    - co z niego będzie? how will he turn out?, what will become of him?
    - będzie z niego dobry pracownik he’ll be a good worker
    - kuchmistrz to z ciebie nie będzie you’ll never make a chef
    - z tych kwiatów nic już nie będzie these flowers/plants have had it pot.
    - z naszych planów/wakacji nic nie będzie nothing will come of our plans/holidays
    - nic z tego nie będzie it’s hopeless
    - nic dobrego z tego nie będzie nothing good will come of it
    - tyle pracy i nic z tego nie ma (he’s done) so much work and nothing to show for it
    4. (odbywać się, zdarzać się) to be
    - koncert/egzamin jest jutro the concert/exam is tomorrow
    - zebranie było w sali konferencyjnej the meeting was (held) in the conference room
    - jutro nie będzie a. nie ma lekcji there are no classes tomorrow
    - był do ciebie telefon there was a phone call for you
    - czy były do mnie jakieś telefony? has anyone called me?
    - był wypadek w kopalni there was an accident in the mine
    - co będzie, jeśli nie zdasz egzaminu? what’s going to happen if you fail the exam?
    - co będzie, jeśli ktoś nas zobaczy? supposing a. what if someone sees us?
    - nie martw się, wszystko będzie dobrze don’t worry, it’ll be a. it’s going to be fine
    - w życiu bywa rozmaicie you never know what life may bring
    - opowiedziałem jej wszystko, tak jak było I told her everything just as it happened
    - co ci/jej jest? what’s the matter with you/her?
    - coś mi/jemu jest something’s the matter with me/him
    - czy jemu coś jest? is anything the matter with him?
    - nic mu nie będzie, to tylko przeziębienie he’ll be fine, it’s only a cold
    5. (uczestniczyć, uczęszczać) to be
    - być na weselu/zebraniu to be at a wedding/meeting
    - wczoraj byliśmy na przyjęciu we were at a reception yesterday
    - być w liceum/na uniwersytecie to be at secondary school/at university
    - być na studiach to be a student a. at college
    - być na prawie/medycynie to study law/medicine
    - był na trzecim roku anglistyki he was in his third year in the English department
    - być na kursie komputerowym to be on a computer course
    - być na wojnie to go to war
    6. (przybyć) to be, to come
    - być pierwszym/drugim to be the first/second to arrive
    - był na mecie trzeci he came third
    - czy był już listonosz? has the postman been a. come yet?
    7. (znajdować się w jakimś stanie) to be
    - być pod urokiem/wrażeniem kogoś/czegoś to be charmed/impressed by sb/sth
    - być pod wpływem kogoś/czegoś to be under the influence of sb/sth
    - prowadzić samochód, będąc pod wpływem alkoholu to drive while under the influence of alcohol
    - być w ciąży to be pregnant
    - być w dobrym/złym humorze to be in a good/bad mood
    - nie być w nastroju do zabawy not to feel like going out a. partying
    - być w doskonałej formie to be in excellent form a. in fine fettle
    - być w strachu to be scared
    - być w rozpaczy to be in despair
    - bądźmy dobrej myśli let’s hope for the best
    - jestem przed obiadem I haven’t had my lunch yet
    - jestem już po śniadaniu I’ve already had breakfast
    - był siedem lat po studiach he had graduated seven years earlier
    - być po kielichu/po paru kieliszkach pot. to have had a drop/a few euf.
    - być na diecie to be on a diet
    - być na kaszce a. kleiku to be on a diet of gruel
    - być na emeryturze/rencie to be on a pension
    - sukienka jest do kolan the dress is knee-length
    - wody było do kostek the water was ankle-deep
    - firanka była do połowy okna the net curtain reached halfway down the window
    - chwila nieuwagi i było po wazonie one unguarded moment and the vase was smashed to pieces
    - jest już po nim/nas! it’s curtains for him/us! pot.
    - jeszcze chwila i byłoby po mnie another instant and it would have been curtains for me a. would have been all up with me pot.
    Ⅱ v aux. 1. (łącznik w orzeczeniu złożonym) to be
    - być nauczycielem/malarzem to be a teacher/painter
    - kiedy dorosnę, będę aktorem when I grow up, I’ll be an actor
    - być Polakiem/Duńczykiem to be Polish/Danish
    - borsuk jest drapieżnikiem the badger is a predator
    - nie bądź dzieckiem! don’t be childish a. such a child!
    - jestem Anna Kowalska I’m Anna Kowalska
    - „cześć, to ty jesteś Robert?” – „nie, jestem Adam” ‘hi, are you Robert? a. you’re Robert, are you?’ – ‘no, I’m Adam’
    - co to jest – ma cztery nogi i robi „miau”? what (is it that) has four legs and says ‘miaow’?
    - była wysoka/niska she was tall/short
    - jest autorką cenioną przez wszystkich she’s an author appreciated by all a. everybody
    - mój dziadek był podobno bardzo przystojnym mężczyzną my grandfather is said to have been a very handsome man
    - wciąż jest taka, jaką była za młodu she’s still her old self
    - kwiaty były żółte i czerwone the flowers were yellow and red
    - pizza była całkiem dobra the pizza was quite good
    - pojemnik był z drewna/plastiku the container was made of wood/plastic
    - z tych listewek byłby ładny latawiec these slats could make a fine kite
    - wszystko to były jedynie domysły it was all only conjecture
    - czyj jest ten samochód? whose car is this?, who does this car belong to?
    - ta książka jest jej/Adama this book is hers/Adam’s, this is her/Adam’s book
    - żona była dla niego wszystkim his wife was everything to him
    - nie naśladuj innych, bądź sobą don’t imitate others, be yourself
    - ta zupa jest zimna this soup is cold
    - Maria jest niewidoma Maria is blind
    - jesteś głodny? are you hungry?
    - Robert jest żonaty/rozwiedziony Robert is married/divorced
    - są małżeństwem od dziesięciu lat they’ve been married for ten years
    - bądź dla niej miły be nice to her
    - bądź tak dobry a. uprzejmy would you mind
    - bądź tak miły i otwórz okno would you mind opening the window?
    - czy byłaby pani uprzejma podać mi sól would you be kind enough a. would you be so kind as to pass me the salt?
    - nie bądź głupi! don’t be a fool!
    - cicho bądź! be quiet!
    - być w kapeluszu/kaloszach/spodniach to be wearing a hat/rubber boots/trousers
    - była w zielonym żakiecie/czarnym berecie she was wearing a green jacket/black beret, she had a green jacket/black beret on
    - być za kimś/czymś (opowiadać się) to support sb/sth, to be for sb/sth
    - byłem za tym, żeby nikomu nic nie mówić I was for not telling anyone anything
    - dwa razy dwa jest cztery two times two is four
    2. (w stronie biernej) artykuł jest dobrze napisany the article is well written
    - ściany pokoju były pomalowane na różowo the walls of the room were painted pink
    - dzieci, które są maltretowane przez rodziców children who are abused by their parents
    - tak jest napisane w gazecie that’s what it says in the paper
    - samochód będzie naprawiony jutro the car will be repaired by tomorrow
    - to musi być zrobione do czwartku this must be done by Thursday
    - sukienka była uszyta z czarnej wełenki the dress was made of black wool
    3. (w czasie przyszłym złożonym) shall, will
    - będzie pamiętał a. pamiętać tę scenę przez cały życie he will remember this scene all his life
    - będziemy długo go wspominali a. wspominać we shall a. will long remember him
    4. przest. (w czasie zaprzeszłym) w Krakowie mieszkał był przed trzema laty he would have been living a. was living in Cracow three years ago 5. (w trybie warunkowym) byłbym napisał a. napisałbym był do ciebie, gdybym znał twój adres I would have written to you, had I known your address a. if I had known your address
    - co by się było stało, gdyby nie jego pomoc what would have happened if it hadn’t been for his help
    - byłaby spadła ze schodów (omal nie) she almost fell down the stairs
    - byłbym zapomniał! zabierz ze sobą śpiwór I almost a. nearly forgot! take a sleeping bag with you
    6. (w zwrotach nieosobowych) było już późno it was already late
    - jest dopiero wpół do ósmej it’s only half past seven
    - nie było co jeść there was nothing to eat
    - za ciepło będzie ci w tym swetrze you’ll be too hot in this jumper
    - byłoby przyjemnie zjeść razem obiad it would be nice to have lunch together
    - wychodzić po zmierzchu było niebezpiecznie it was dangerous going out after dark
    - nie kupić tego mieszkania będzie niewybaczalnym błędem not to buy that a. the flat would be an inexcusable mistake
    - z chorym było źle/coraz gorzej the patient was bad/getting worse
    - z dziadkiem jest nienajlepiej grandfather is poorly
    - wszystko będzie na niego he’ll get all the blame
    - żeby nie było na mnie I don’t want to get the blame
    - na imię było jej Maria her name was Maria
    - było dobrze po północy it was well after midnight
    - będzie z godzinę/trzy lata temu an hour or so/some three years ago
    - będzie kwadrans jak wyszedł he must have left fifteen minutes or so ago, it’s been fifteen minutes or so since he left
    - do najbliższego sklepu będzie ze trzy kilometry it’s a good three kilometres to the nearest shop
    - nie ma tu gdzie usiąść there’s nowhere here to sit
    - w tym mieście na ma dokąd pójść wieczorem there’s nowhere to go at night in this town
    - nie ma komu posprzątać/zrobić zakupy there’s no-one to clean/to do shopping
    - nie ma z kim się bawić there’s no-one to play with
    7. (z czasownikami niewłaściwymi) to be
    - trzeba było coś z tym zrobić something had to be done about it
    - trzeba było od razu tak mówić why didn’t you say so in the first place?
    - czytać można było tylko przy świecach one could read only by candlelight
    - jest gorzej niż można było przypuszczać it’s worse than might have been expected
    ■ bądź zdrów! (pożegnanie) goodbye!, take care!
    - być bez forsy/przy forsie pot. to be penniless/flush pot.
    - być do niczego (bezużyteczny) [osoba, przedmiot] to be useless a. no good; (chory, słaby) [osoba] to be poorly a. out of sorts
    - być może perhaps, maybe
    - być może nam się uda perhaps we’ll succeed
    - być może a. może być, że… it may happen that…
    - być niczym [osoba] to be a nobody
    - znałem ją, kiedy jeszcze była nikim I knew her when she was still a nobody
    - być przy nadziei a. być w poważnym a. odmiennym a. błogosławionym stanie książk. to be in an interesting condition a. in the family way przest.; to have a bun in the oven euf., pot.
    - było nie było (tak czy owak) when all’s said and done, after all; (niech się dzieje co chce) come what may, be that as it may
    - było nie było, to już ćwierć wieku od naszego ślubu when all’s said and done a. after all, it’s twenty-five years since we got married
    - było nie było, idę pogadać z szefem o podwyżce come what may, I’m going to the boss to talk about a rise
    - było siedzieć w domu/nie pożyczać mu pieniędzy pot. serves you right, you should have stayed at home/shouldn’t have lent him money
    - było nic mu nie mówić you should have told him nothing
    - co będzie, to będzie whatever will be, will be
    - co było, to było let bygones be bygones
    - co jest? pot. what’s up? pot.
    - co jest, do jasnej cholery? dlaczego nikt nie otwiera? what the hell’s going on? – why doesn’t anyone open the door? pot.
    - co jest? przyjacielowi paru groszy żałujesz? what’s wrong? – can’t spare a friend a few pence? pot.
    - coś w tym jest a. coś w tym musi być there must be something in it
    - coś w tym musi być, że wszyscy dyrektorzy będą na tym zebraniu there must be something in it, if all the directors are going to the meeting
    - jakoś to będzie things’ll a. it’ll work out somehow pot.
    - nie ma co a. rady oh well
    - nie ma co, trzeba brać się do roboty oh well, time to do some work
    - nie ma co! well, well!
    - mieszkanie, nie ma co, widne i ustawne well, well, not a bad flat, airy and well laid out
    - ładnie się spisałeś, nie ma co! iron. well, well, you’ve done it now, haven’t you!
    - nie ma (to) jak kuchnia domowa/kieliszek zimnej wódki nothing beats a. you can’t beat home cooking/a glass of cold vodka
    - nie ma (to) jak muzyka klasyczna give me classical music every time
    - nie ma to jak wakacje! there’s nothing like a holiday!
    - nie może być! (niedowierzanie) I don’t believe it!, you don’t say!
    - niech będzie! oh well!
    - niech ci/wam będzie! have it your own way!
    - niech mu/jej będzie! let him/her have his/her own way!
    - niech tak będzie! (zgoda) so be it!
    - tak jest! (owszem) (that’s) right!
    - „to jest pańskie ostatnie słowo” – „tak jest, ostatnie” ‘is that your final word?’ – ‘yes, it is’, ‘that’s right’
    - tak jest, panie pułkowniku/generale! Wojsk. yes, sir!
    - to jest książk. that is, that is to say
    - główne gałęzie przemysłu, to jest górnictwo i hutnictwo the main branches of industry, that is (to say) mining and metallurgy
    * * *
    (jestem, jesteś); pl jesteśmy; pl jesteście; pl są; imp bądź; pt był, była, byli; sg fut będę; sg fut; będziesz; vi

    jestem! — present!, here!

    jest ciepło/zimno — it's warm/cold

    jest mi zimno/przykro — I'm cold/sorry

    będę pamiętać lub pamiętał — I will remember

    co będzie, jeśli nie przyjdą? — what will happen if they don't come?

    nie może być! — this lub it can't be!

    tak jest! — yes, sir!

    jestem za +instr /przeciw być — +dat I am for/against

    * * *
    I.
    być1
    ipf.
    1. (= znajdować się w jakimś stanie l. miejscu) be; (= istnieć) exist, be there; być na diecie be on a diet; być na emeryturze be retired; jestem po robocie I'm finished l. done with work (for today); pewnego razu był sobie król... once upon a time there lived a king...; w ogrodzie były róże there were roses in the garden; w Galaktyce są miliardy gwiazd there are billions of stars in the Galaxy; ile ich jest? how many of them are there?; być w kinie be at the theater; być na wycieczce be on a trip; być w Warszawie be in Warsaw; być u babci na wsi be at grandma's house in the country; być z kimś sam na sam be one on one with sb; od świtu jestem na nogach I have been on my feet all day; Ewa jest na ostatnich nogach Eva is ready to drop l. dead on her feet; jesteś na drodze do zawału you are on the road to a heart attack; wszystko jest na swoim miejscu everything is in its place; to było nie na miejscu that was out of line; być na ustach całego miasteczka be on the lips of everyone in town; być jedną nogą na tamtym świecie have one foot in the grave; co dzisiaj będzie na obiad? what's for supper today?; wszystko jest pod ręką we have everything right at hand; być u steru przen. be at the wheel; no to jestem w domu (= zrozumiałem) that hits home; być w latach l. w leciech be up in one's years; być w sile wieku be in one's prime; być w opałach be in a bind; teraz wszystko jest w twoich rękach now everything is in your hands l. up to you; być w siódmym niebie be in seventh heaven; być w swoim żywiole be in one's element; być na zebraniu be at a meeting; być na wojnie be (fighting) in a war; być na studiach be at college; być na anglistyce be in the English Department; nigdy nie byłem w Chicago I've never been to Chicago; Adam jest pod pantoflem swojej żony Adam is henpecked; być nie w sosie be in a bad mood; jest gaz i woda we have gas and water; jestem takiego samego zdania I'm of the same opinion; jestem dobrej myśli I'm hoping for the best; jest mi u ciebie tak dobrze I feel so good at your place; jest mi głupio I feel stupid; to jest do niczego it's no good; być górą be on top; to nie jest czas po temu this is not the time for that; to nie jest mi na rękę this is inconvenient (for me); to nie jest po mojej myśli that's not what I intended l. what I had in mind; jestem pod wrażeniem I'm impressed; jestem bez pieniędzy I'm broke; jestem w ciąży I'm pregnant; Ewa jest przy nadziei przest. Eva is in the family way; jestem na służbie I'm on duty; byliśmy na spacerze we were taking a walk; dobrze wiesz, że jesteś na mojej łasce you know fully well that you're at my mercy; czy jesteś w stanie mnie zrozumieć? are you able to understand me?; jestem w dobrym humorze I'm in a good mood; byliśmy w kłopocie, co zrobić z... we couldn't figure out what to do with...; Ewa przez moment była w rozterce for a moment Ewa was in a dilemma; Ewa jest z Adamem w przyjaźni Ewa is friends with Adam; po czyjej jesteś stronie? whose side are you on?; Adam jest w porządku Adam is OK l. alright; to nie jest w moim guście that's not my style; jestem na bakier z gramatyką I haven't a clue about grammar; z teściową jestem na złej stopie I'm on bad terms with my mother-in-law; z prezesem jestem na ty I'm on a first name basis with the president; jestem za reformą I'm for the reform; oni są z sobą za pan brat they are on familiar terms; jestem z Ewą po słowie przest. I'm engaged to Eve.
    2. ( część orzeczenia imiennego) jestem studentem I am a student; byłam piosenkarką I was a singer; będę generałem I will be a general; ta dziewczyna jest ładna that girl is pretty; samochód jest ojca that's father's car; ten długopis nie jest mój this pen isn't mine; bądź zdrów! get well!; jesteś dla mnie niczym! you mean nothing to me; on nie był sobą he wasn't himself; dwa razy dwa jest cztery two plus two is l. equals four.
    3. ( w zdaniach bezosobowych) (= zdarzać się) jest piękny dzień it's a beautiful day; był kwiecień it was April; było to dość dawno it was l. happened quite a long time ago; był do ciebie telefon you had a call; było już późno it was getting late; nie ma co jeść there's nothing to eat; będzie z godzinę temu, jak... it's been an hour since...; a co będzie ze mną? what will happen to me?; ciekaw jestem, co z niego będzie I'm curious (about) what will become of him; jeżeli tak jest if it is so; być może maybe, perhaps; co będzie, to będzie come what may; co było, to było let bygones be bygones; jakoś to (w końcu) będzie thing's will turn out fine (in the end); co ci jest? what's wrong l. the matter with you?; z tej mąki nie będzie chleba it's hopeless; nie może być that's impossible; jest już po nim it's too late for him; he's done for; he's a goner l. a has-been; co było, a nie jest, nie pisze się w rejestr what's done is done; tak jest! exactly!, precisely!, that's right; wojsk. yes, sir!; to jest (= czyli) that is; było nie było whatever happens; no matter what (happens).
    II.
    być2
    ipf.
    1. tylko będę będziesz itd. ( w formach czasu przyszłego) will (be); będę pamiętał o tym I'll remember that; dzieci będą w ogrodzie the kids will be in the garden; będziemy śpiewać kolędy we're going to sing carols.
    2. ( w formach strony biernej) dom był sprzedany za... the house was sold for...; jesteś obserwowany you are being watched; droga jest już naprawiona the road has been repaired.

    The New English-Polish, Polish-English Kościuszko foundation dictionary > być

  • 15 huella

    f.
    1 footprint.
    huella digital o dactilar fingerprint
    huella genética genetic fingerprint
    2 trace (vestigio).
    3 mark.
    dejar huella to leave one's mark
    4 step.
    pres.indicat.
    3rd person singular (él/ella/ello) present indicative of spanish verb: hollar.
    * * *
    1 (de pie) footprint; (de ruedas) track
    2 figurado (vestigio) trace, sign
    \
    dejar huella to leave one's mark (en, on)
    no quedar ni huella not to be a trace
    seguir las huellas de alguien figurado to follow in somebody's footsteps
    huella dactilar fingerprint
    * * *
    noun f.
    * * *
    SF
    1) [en el suelo] (=pisada) footprint, footstep; [de coche, animal] track

    huella dactilar, huella digital — fingerprint

    2) (=rastro) trace

    sin dejar huella — without leaving a trace, leaving no sign

    3) (=impronta)
    4) (=acto) tread, treading
    5) [de escalera] tread
    * * *
    a) ( pisada - de persona) footprint, footstep; (- de rueda) track

    las huellas del animal — the animal's tracks o pawprints (o hoofmarks etc)

    b) ( vestigio) mark
    c) ( de escalón) tread
    * * *
    = trace, footprint, imprint, footprint, footprint, track, print.
    Ex. But there was no trace of sinisterness in Balzac's manner.
    Ex. Such compact drives are attractive devices for laptop computers and for internal installation in desktop computers with compact footprints.
    Ex. Harris was a librarian par excellence, whose imprint will become indelible in the history of Nigerian librarianship.
    Ex. In later years, the famous book mythological significance of muddy footprints introduced me to the ancient Hippopotamian culture.
    Ex. The article is entitled 'The Information footprint: a satellite-based information service'.
    Ex. Topics include trees, leaf coloration, buds, seeds, vertebrate animals, animal tracks, insects and other arthropods, earthworms, characteristics of living things, and microhabitats.
    Ex. Some of the exhibition's objects are plaster casts of such perishables as dying daffodil heads and hoof prints.
    ----
    * borrar + Posesivo + huellas = cover up + Posesivo + tracks.
    * dejar huella = leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + a trace, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + an impression, leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * dejar huellas = leave + footprints.
    * dejar una huella imborrable = leave + a lasting memory.
    * dejar una huella imborrable = leave + a lasting impression.
    * desaparecer sin dejar huella = evaporate into + thin air, vanish into + thin air, disappear into + thin air, disappear without + a trace, disappear into + the blue, vanish into + the blue.
    * hacer huella = leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * huella dactilar = fingerprint [finger-print].
    * huella de carbono = carbon imprint, carbon footprint.
    * huella dejada por el pulgar = thumb-mark.
    * huella ecológica = ecological imprint, ecological footprint.
    * huellas = set of tracks.
    * identificación mediante las huellas dactilares = finger-print identification.
    * sin dejar huella = into thin air.
    * * *
    a) ( pisada - de persona) footprint, footstep; (- de rueda) track

    las huellas del animal — the animal's tracks o pawprints (o hoofmarks etc)

    b) ( vestigio) mark
    c) ( de escalón) tread
    * * *
    = trace, footprint, imprint, footprint, footprint, track, print.

    Ex: But there was no trace of sinisterness in Balzac's manner.

    Ex: Such compact drives are attractive devices for laptop computers and for internal installation in desktop computers with compact footprints.
    Ex: Harris was a librarian par excellence, whose imprint will become indelible in the history of Nigerian librarianship.
    Ex: In later years, the famous book mythological significance of muddy footprints introduced me to the ancient Hippopotamian culture.
    Ex: The article is entitled 'The Information footprint: a satellite-based information service'.
    Ex: Topics include trees, leaf coloration, buds, seeds, vertebrate animals, animal tracks, insects and other arthropods, earthworms, characteristics of living things, and microhabitats.
    Ex: Some of the exhibition's objects are plaster casts of such perishables as dying daffodil heads and hoof prints.
    * borrar + Posesivo + huellas = cover up + Posesivo + tracks.
    * dejar huella = leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + a trace, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + an impression, leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * dejar huellas = leave + footprints.
    * dejar una huella imborrable = leave + a lasting memory.
    * dejar una huella imborrable = leave + a lasting impression.
    * desaparecer sin dejar huella = evaporate into + thin air, vanish into + thin air, disappear into + thin air, disappear without + a trace, disappear into + the blue, vanish into + the blue.
    * hacer huella = leave + an impression, touch + Posesivo + life, leave + Posesivo + mark, cut + a swath(e), leave + an imprint, make + an impression.
    * huella dactilar = fingerprint [finger-print].
    * huella de carbono = carbon imprint, carbon footprint.
    * huella dejada por el pulgar = thumb-mark.
    * huella ecológica = ecological imprint, ecological footprint.
    * huellas = set of tracks.
    * identificación mediante las huellas dactilares = finger-print identification.
    * sin dejar huella = into thin air.

    * * *
    1 (pisada — de una persona) footprint, footstep; (— de un animal) pawprint ( o hoofmark etc)
    siguieron las huellas del animal they followed the animal's tracks o pawprints ( o hoofmarks etc)
    2 (vestigio) mark
    la huella islámica en la literatura española the Islamic influence on Spanish literature
    en su rostro se veía la huella del tiempo time had left its mark on his face ( liter)
    desaparecieron sin dejar huella they disappeared without (a) trace
    Compuestos:
    carbon footprint
    ecological footprint
    genetic fingerprint
    ● huellas dactilares or digitales
    fpl fingerprints (pl)
    social impact; social footprint
    * * *

     

    Del verbo hollar: ( conjugate hollar)

    huella es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente indicativo

    2ª persona singular (tú) imperativo

    Multiple Entries:
    hollar    
    huella
    huella sustantivo femenino

    (— de rueda) track;
    ◊ las huellas del animal the animal's tracks o pawprints (o hoofmarks etc);

    huellas dactilares fingerprints
    b) ( vestigio) mark;


    huella sustantivo femenino
    1 (pisada) footprint
    (de vehículo, animal) track
    huella dactilar o digital, fingerprint
    2 fig (rastro, señal) trace, sign
    dejar la huella, to leave one's mark: dejó una huella en el cristal, it left a mark on the glass
    ' huella' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    dactilar
    - estampar
    - imprimir
    - marca
    - pisada
    - seña
    - señal
    - señalar
    - dejar
    - impacto
    - indicio
    - marcar
    - mordida
    - perro
    - rastro
    - reciente
    - resquicio
    English:
    fingerprint
    - footprint
    - impression
    - imprint
    - mark
    - print
    - sign
    - skidmark
    - suspicion
    - track
    - finger
    - foot
    * * *
    ♦ nf
    1. [de persona] footprint;
    [de animal, rueda] track;
    seguir las huellas de alguien to follow in sb's footsteps
    huella dactilar fingerprint;
    huella digital fingerprint;
    huella genética genetic fingerprint
    2. [vestigio] trace;
    todavía no han desaparecido las huellas de las inundaciones you can still see the signs of the flooding
    3. [impresión profunda] mark;
    su rostro reflejaba las huellas del esfuerzo her face showed signs of the effort she was putting in;
    dejar huella: desaparecieron sin dejar huella they vanished without trace;
    un estilo de componer que ha dejado huella a style of composing that has been very influential;
    sus enseñanzas dejaron huella en sus discípulos her teachings influenced her followers
    4. [de escalón] tread
    * * *
    f mark; de animal track;
    seguir las huellas de alguien follow in s.o.’s footsteps
    * * *
    huella, etc. hollar
    huella nf
    1) : footprint
    seguir las huellas de alguien: to follow in someone's footsteps
    2) : mark, impact
    dejar huella: to leave one's mark
    sin dejar huella: without a trace
    3)
    huella dactilar : fingerprint
    * * *
    1. (de persona) footprint
    2. (de animal, vehículo) track

    Spanish-English dictionary > huella

  • 16 agir

    agir [aʒiʀ]
    ➭ TABLE 2
    1. intransitive verb
       a. to act ; ( = se comporter) to behave
    • il a bien/mal agi envers sa mère he behaved well/badly towards his mother
       b. ( = exercer une influence) agir sur qn to bring pressure to bear on sb
    2. reflexive verb
    ► s'agir
    ► il s'agit de ( = il est question de) it is a matter of... ; ( = il est nécessaire de faire)
    • de quoi s'agit-il ? what's it about?
    • s'agissant de... as regards...
    • quand il s'agit de critiquer, il est toujours là he's always ready to criticize
    • il ne s'agit pas de ça ! that's not it!
    • il s'agit bien de ça ! (ironic) that's hardly the problem!
    • avec la sécurité, il ne s'agit pas de plaisanter safety is no joking matter
    * * *
    aʒiʀ
    1.
    verbe intransitif
    2) ( se comporter) to behave, to act

    bien/mal agir — to behave well/badly (envers, avec toward(s))

    3) ( avoir un effet) [substance, médicament] to take effect, to work

    agir sur quelque chose/quelqu'un — to have an effect on something/somebody

    agir sur le marché — Finance to influence the market


    2.
    s'agir de verbe pronominal impersonnel
    1)

    de quoi s'agit-il? — ( question) what is it about?; ( problème) what's the matter?

    il s'agit de votre mari — it's about your husband, it's to do with your husband

    on connaît maintenant les gagnants: il s'agit de messieurs X et Y — we now know who the winners are: they're Mr X and Mr Y

    d'après les experts il s'agirait d'un attentat — according to the experts, it would appear to be an act of terrorism

    quand il s'agit d'argent/de faire le ménage — when it comes to money/to doing the housework

    s'agissant de quelque chose/quelqu'un — as regards something/somebody

    il s'agit bien de partir en vacances maintenant que je suis au chômage! — iron now that I'm unemployed it's hardly the (right) time to talk about going on vacation!

    il s'agit de faire vite — we/you etc must act quickly

    * * *
    aʒiʀ vi
    1) (= se comporter) to behave, to act
    2) (= faire quelque chose) to act, to take action

    Il faut agir rapidement. — We must act fast.

    3) (= avoir de l'effet) [médicament] to act
    * * *
    agir verb table: finir
    A vi
    1 ( accomplir une action) to act; décider/refuser d'agir to decide/to refuse to act ou to take action; il a agi sous le coup de la colère he acted in anger; assez parlé, maintenant il faut agir! that's enough talk, now we've got to act ou let's have some action!; agir comme intermédiaire to act as an intermediary; il est urgent d'agir urgent action must be taken; il parle beaucoup mais agit peu he's all talk and no action; agir avec prudence to proceed with caution;
    2 ( se comporter) to behave, to act; bien/mal agir to behave well/badly (envers, avec towardsGB); agir comme un enfant/idiot to behave childishly/stupidly, to act like a child/fool; je n'aime pas sa manière or façon d'agir I don't like the way he/she behaves; agir en honnête homme to behave honourablyGB; agir en lâche/gentleman to act like a coward/gentleman; agir comme on l'entend to do what one likes;
    3 ( avoir un effet) [substance, médicament] to take effect, to work; le somnifère agit immédiatement the sleeping pill takes effect ou works ou acts immediately; le médicament n'a pas agi the medicine hasn't worked; agir sur qch/qn to have an effect on sth/sb; agir comme un signal d'alarme to serve as an alarm signal; agir sur le marché Fin to influence the market;
    4 ( intervenir) agir auprès de to approach; agir auprès d'un ministre pour obtenir une faveur to approach a minister in order to obtain a favourGB;
    5 Jur agir contre qn to take legal action against sb; agir au civil to sue; agir au criminel to prosecute.
    B s'agir de vpr impers
    1 ( il est question de) de quoi s'agit-il? what is it about? ; ( il y a un problème) what's the matter?; mais il ne s'agit pas de ça! but that's not the point!; mais il s'agit de ton bonheur/ta santé! but we're talking about your happiness/your health here!, but it's your happiness/your health that's at stake (here)!; dans ce livre, il s'agit d'une famille d'agriculteurs this book is about a family of farmers; il s'agit de votre mari it's about your husband, it's to do with your husband; on connaît maintenant les gagnants: il s'agit de messieurs X et Y we now know who the winners are: they're Mr X and Mr Y; d'après les experts il s'agirait d'un attentat according to the experts, it would appear to be an act of terrorism; quand il s'agit de faire le ménage, il n'est jamais là! when there's cleaning to be done, he's never there ou around!; quand il s'agit d'argent il est toujours là! where money' s concerned ou when it comes to money, he's always right in there!; s'agissant de qch/qn as regards sth/sb; il s'agit bien de partir en vacances maintenant que je suis au chômage! iron now that I'm unemployed it's hardly the (right) time to talk about going on vacation!;
    2 ( il est nécessaire de) il s'agit de faire vite we/you etc must act quickly; il s'agit de se remettre au travail we/you etc must get back to work; il s'agit de vous ressaisir! you must pull yourself together!; il s'agit de savoir ce que tu veux! make up your mind!; il ne s'agit pas de changer d'avis à la dernière minute! there's no question of a last-minute change of mind!; il s'agit pour le gouvernement de redonner confiance aux électeurs/relancer l'économie what the government must do now is regain the confidence of the electorate/boost the economy; il s'agirait de se mettre d'accord: vous venez mardi ou jeudi? we'd better get it straight: are you coming on Tuesday or Thursday?; il ne s'agit pas de rater notre coup, il s'agit de ne pas rater notre coup we must get it right the first time.
    C ○ s'agir que vpr impers il s'agit qu'il obéisse! he must do as he's told!; il ne s'agit pas qu'elle soit en retard! she mustn't be late!
    [aʒir] verbe intransitif
    A.[AVOIR UNE ACTIVITÉ]
    1. [intervenir] to act, to take action
    en cas d'incendie, il faut agir vite in the event of a fire, it is important to act quickly
    2. [passer à l'action] to do something
    assez parlé, maintenant il faut agir! enough talk, let's have some action!
    3. [se comporter] to act, to behave
    bien/mal agir envers quelqu'un to behave well/badly towards somebody
    B.[AVOIR UN EFFET]
    1. [fonctionner - poison, remède] to act, to take effect, to work ; [ - élément nutritif] to act, to have an effect ; [ - détergent] to work
    2. [avoir une influence]
    agir sur to work ou to have an effect on
    C.[DANS LE DOMAINE JURIDIQUE] to act in a court of law
    a. [en droit pénal] to prosecute somebody
    b. [en droit civil] to sue somebody
    agir au nom de ou pour quelqu'un to act on behalf of ou for somebody
    ————————
    s'agir de verbe impersonnel
    1. [être question de]
    je voudrais vous parler d'une affaire importante, voici ce dont il s'agit I'd like to talk to you about an important matter, namely this
    mais enfin, il s'agit de sa santé! but her health is at stake (here)!
    s'il ne s'agissait que d'argent, la solution serait simple! if it were only a question of money, the answer would be simple!
    une augmentation? il s'agit bien de cela à l'heure où l'on parle de licenciements (ironique) a rise? that's very likely now there's talk of redundancies (ironique)
    quand il s'agit d'aller à la chasse, il trouve toujours le temps! when it comes to going hunting, he can always find time!
    quand il s'agit de râler, tu es toujours là! you can always be relied upon to moan!
    une voiture a explosé, il s'agirait d'un accident a car has exploded, apparently by accident
    2. [falloir]
    il s'agit de: maintenant, il s'agit de lui parler now we must talk to her
    il s'agit de savoir si... the question is whether...
    dis donc, il ne s'agit pas de se perdre! come on, we mustn't get lost now!
    il s'agit bien de pleurer maintenant que tu l'as cassé! you may well cry, now that you've broken it!
    ————————
    s'agissant de locution prépositionnelle
    1. [en ce qui concerne] as regards, with regard to
    2. [puisque cela concerne]
    un service d'ordre ne s'imposait pas, s'agissant d'une manifestation pacifique there was no need for a police presence, given that this was a peaceful demonstration

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > agir

  • 17 jouer

    jouer [ʒwe]
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ━━━━━━━━━
    ➭ TABLE 1
    1. <
       a. to play
    • à qui de jouer ? whose go is it?
    • bien joué ! well played! ; (figurative) well done!
    • à quoi joues-tu ? what are you playing at?
       c. [acteur, musicien] to play
    • il joue dans « Hamlet » he's in "Hamlet"
    2. <
       a. (gén) to play
    • on joue « Macbeth » ce soir "Macbeth" is on this evening
    ► jouer + tour(s)
       b. ( = mettre en jeu) [+ argent] (au casino) to stake ; (aux courses) to bet ( sur on ) ; [+ cheval] to back
       c. (Computing) [+ application] to play
    3. <
       a. ( = être joué)
       c. ( = se moquer) se jouer de qn to deceive sb
    * * *
    ʒwe
    1.
    1) Jeux, Sport to play [match, jeu, carte]; to back [cheval, favori]; to stake [argent]; to risk [réputation, vie]
    2) Musique to play [morceau, compositeur, disque]
    3) Cinéma, Théâtre [personne] to perform [pièce]; [personne] to act [Shakespeare]; [personne] to play [rôle]; [cinéma] to show [film]; [théâtre] to put on [pièce]
    4) ( incarner)

    2.
    jouer à verbe transitif indirect

    jouer à — to play [tennis, échecs, roulette]; to play with [poupée]; to play [cowboy, Tarzan]

    à quoi jouez-vous? — lit what are you playing?; fig what are you playing at?

    jouer à qui perd gagne — to play ‘loser takes all’

    jouer à la marchande/au docteur — to play shops/doctors and nurses


    3.
    jouer de verbe transitif indirect

    jouer de — to play [instrument]

    jouer de — to use [influence] ( pour faire to do)


    4.
    verbe intransitif
    1) ( s'amuser) [enfant, animal] to play ( avec with)

    c'était pour jouer, ne le prenez pas mal! — I/he etc was only joking, don't be offended!

    2) ( pratiquer un jeu) to play; ( avec de l'argent) to gamble

    à toi de jouer! — ( au jeu) your turn!; fig the ball's in your court!

    bien joué! — ( au jeu) well played!; fig well done!

    j'en ai assez, je ne joue plus! — I've had enough, count me out!

    jouer avec — to gamble with [vie, santé]; to put [something] on the line [réputation]; to play with [sentiments]

    4) ( spéculer) to gamble

    jouer sur — to play on [crédulité, lassitude]; to speculate in [valeur boursière]

    5) Cinéma, Musique, Théâtre [acteur] to act; [musicien, radio] to play
    6) ( produire des effets) [lumière, flammes, vent] to play ( sur on; dans in)
    7) ( intervenir) [argument, clause] to apply; [âge, qualification] to matter

    jouer en faveur de quelqu'un — to work in somebody's favour [BrE]

    8) ( être mal ajusté) to be loose

    5.
    se jouer verbe pronominal
    1) Cinéma, Musique, Théâtre [musique] to be played; [film] to be shown; [pièce] to be performed
    2) Jeux, Sport [jeu, sport] to be played; [partie, rencontre] ( amicalement) to be played; ( avec enjeu) to be played out
    3) ( être en jeu) [avenir, sort, paix] to be at stake

    se jouer de — to make light of [difficulté]; to defy [pesanteur, gravité]; to make light work of [obstacle]

    * * *
    ʒwe
    1. vi
    1) (= s'amuser) to play

    Elle est allée jouer avec les petits voisins. — She's gone to play with the children next door.

    2) THÉÂTRE, CINÉMA to act

    Je trouve qu'il joue très bien dans ce film. — I think he acts very well in this film.

    3) (= avoir du jeu) [clef, pièce] to be loose
    4) (= se voiler) [bois, porte] to warp
    5) (= être en jeu) to come into play, to come into it
    6) (= parier) to gamble, to play for money

    jouer sur — to gamble on, to bet on

    jouer de qch MUSIQUE — to play sth, fig (= tirer parti de) to use sth

    Il joue de la guitare et du piano. — He plays the guitar and the piano.

    jouer à qch (= pratiquer) [jeu, sport] — to play sth

    Elle joue au tennis. — She plays tennis.

    à toi de jouer — it's your go, it's your turn, figit's up to you now

    2. vt
    1) MUSIQUE to play
    2) [partie, carte, coup] play
    3) [argent, réputation] to stake, to wager
    4) [pièce] to perform, [rôle] to play, [film] to show

    On joue Hamlet au Théâtre de la Ville. — Hamlet is on at the Théâtre de la Ville., They're doing Hamlet at the Théâtre de la Ville.

    C'est un très jeune acteur qui joue le rôle principal. — A very young actor is playing the lead role.

    jouer la comédie fig — to put on an act, to put it on

    5) (= simuler) [sentiment] to affect, to feign

    jouer un tour à qn (= faire une plaisanterie) — to play a trick on sb

    Ma mémoire me joue des tours. — My memory is playing tricks on me., [comportement] to backfire

    Ce genre de comportement risque de lui jouer des tours. — This kind of behavior could well backfire on him.

    * * *
    jouer verb table: aimer
    A vtr
    1 Jeux, Sport, Turf to play [match, jeu, partie]; to play [carte, couleur, atout]; to move [pièce d'échecs, pion de dames]; to back [cheval, favori]; to stake [somme, argent, objet]; to risk [réputation, vie]; partie mal jouée poorly played game; jouer carreau to play diamonds; jouer un cheval gagnant/placé to back a horse to win/for a place; jouons le dîner à la courte paille let's draw straws to see who pays for dinner; c'est joué d'avance it's a foregone conclusion; tout n'est pas encore joué the game isn't over yet; jouer le tout pour le tout to go for broke○; ⇒ pendable;
    2 Mus to play [morceau, compositeur, disque] (à on); jouer du Bach à la guitare to play some Bach on the guitar; concerto admirablement joué beautifully played concerto;
    3 Cin, Théât [personne] to perform [pièce]; [personne] to play [rôle, personnage]; [personne] to act [Shakespeare]; [cinéma] to show [film]; [théâtre] to put on [pièce]; l'auteur le plus joué de France the most frequently performed playwright in France; mon rêve est de jouer Figaro my dream is to play Figaro; faire jouer une pièce to stage a play; quel film joue-t-on au Rex? what film is showing at the Rex?; théâtre qui ne joue que de l'avant-garde theatreGB that only puts on avant-garde plays; ⇒ fille, scène;
    4 ( incarner) jouer les imbéciles to play dumb; jouer les innocents or l'innocent to play the innocent; jouer le désespoir/la surprise to pretend to be in despair/surprised; jouer les héros to take unnecessary risks.
    B jouer à vtr ind to play [tennis, échecs, roulette]; to play with [poupée]; to play [cowboy, Tarzan]; to bet on [courses]; à quoi jouez-vous? lit what are you playing?; fig what are you playing at?; jouer à qui perd gagne to play ‘loser takes all’; jouer à la marchande/au docteur to play shops/doctors and nurses; jouer au con◑ to play dumb; ⇒ souris.
    C jouer de vtr ind
    1 Mus jouer de to play [instrument]; jouer du violon/de la flûte to play the violin/the flute;
    2 ( se servir de) jouer de to use [capacité, ascendant, influence, infirmité] (pour faire to do).
    D vi
    1 ( s'amuser) [enfant, animal] to play (avec with); allez jouer dehors, les enfants! go and play outside, children!; va faire jouer les enfants dans le parc take the children to play in the park; chat qui joue avec une souris cat playing with a mouse; on n'est pas ici pour jouer! we're not here to play games!; c'était pour jouer, ne le prenez pas mal! I was only joking, don't be offended!;
    2 ( pratiquer un jeu) to play; ( avec de l'argent) to gamble; jouer pour de l'argent to play for money; il joue dans l'équipe de Bordeaux he plays for Bordeaux; à toi de jouer! lit your turn!; fig the ball's in your court!; bien joué! ( au jeu) well played!; fig well done!; jouer gagnant/perdant to be onto a winner/loser; j'en ai assez, je ne joue plus! I've had enough, count me out!; arrête de jouer avec ton stylo/ta bague! stop fiddling with your pen/your ring!;
    3 ( traiter à la légère) jouer avec to gamble with [vie, santé]; to put [sth] on the line [réputation]; to play with [sentiments]; ne joue pas avec mon cœur don't play with my feelings;
    4 ( spéculer) to gamble; jouer en Bourse to gamble on the stock exchange; jouer gros/petit to gamble for high/small stakes; jouer le sterling à la baisse to sell sterling short; jouer le sterling à la hausse to take a long position on sterling; jouer sur to play on [crédulité, lassitude]; to speculate in [valeur boursière]; jouer sur les dissensions au sein d'un parti to play on disagreements within a party; ⇒ tableau;
    5 Cin, Mus, Théât [acteur] to act; [musicien, radio, disque, musique] to play; jouer dans un film to act in a film; dans quelle pièce/quel théâtre joue-t-elle? which play/theatreGB is she acting in?; jouer en mesure to play in time; le pianiste a joué devant/pour un public réduit the pianist played to/for a small audience;
    6 ( produire des effets) [lumière, flammes, vent] to play (sur on; dans in); une brise légère jouait dans tes cheveux/dans les branchages a light breeze played with your hair/in the branches;
    7 ( intervenir) [argument, clause] to apply; [âge, qualification] to matter; cet argument ne joue pas dans ce cas that argument doesn't apply ou mean much in this case; l'âge ne joue pas dans ce métier age doesn't matter in this job; les questions d'argent ne jouent pas entre eux money is not a problem in their relationship; les considérations qui ont joué dans ma décision the considerations that played a part in my decision; jouer en faveur de qn to work in sb's favourGB; jouer comme un déclic to serve as the trigger; faire jouer la clé dans la serrure to jiggle the key in the lock; faire jouer ses relations to make use of one's connections; ses relations n'ont pas joué comme prévu his/her connections didn't prove as useful as expected; faire or laisser jouer le marché to allow the free play of market forces;
    8 Mécan ( être mal ajusté) to be loose; le contrevent a joué et ne ferme plus the shutter has worked loose and won't close any more; l'humidité a fait jouer les boiseries the damp has made the panellingGB warp.
    E se jouer vpr
    1 Cin, Mus, Théât [musique, air] to be played; [film] to be shown; [pièce, auteur, compositeur] to be performed;
    2 Jeux, Sport [jeu, sport] to be played; [partie, rencontre] ( amicalement) to be played; ( avec enjeu) to be played out; le match s'est joué sous la pluie the match was played in the rain;
    3 ( être en jeu) [avenir, sort, paix] to be at stake, to hang in the balance; c'est l'avenir du pays qui se joue the future of the country is at stake ou hangs in the balance; le sort des réfugiés va se jouer à la conférence sur la paix the fate of the refugees hangs on the peace conference; le drame qui se joue dans le tiers-monde the drama which is being played out in the Third World; il va se jouer une partie décisive entre les deux firmes a decisive contest is going to be played out between the two firms;
    4 ( triompher de) se jouer de to make light of [difficulté]; to defy [pesanteur, gravité]; to make light work of [obstacle]; il a triomphé de tous ses concurrents/tous les obstacles comme en se jouant he triumphed over all his competitors/all obstacles without even trying.
    [ʒwe] verbe intransitif
    1. [s'amuser] to play
    jouer au ballon/au train électrique/à la poupée to play with a ball/an electric train/a doll
    jouer à la marchande/au docteur to play (at) shops/doctors and nurses
    il jouait avec sa gomme he was playing ou fiddling with his eraser
    jouer avec les sentiments de quelqu'un to play ou to trifle with somebody's feelings
    tu joues avec ta santé/vie you're gambling with your health/life
    2. LOISIRS & SPORT to play
    jouer au golf/football/squash to play golf/football/squash
    jouer aux cartes/au billard to play cards/billiards
    il joue à l'avant/à l'arrière he plays up front/in defence
    a. [aux cartes] (it's) your turn
    b. [aux échecs] (it's) your move
    jouer contre quelqu'un/une équipe to play (against) somebody/a team
    3. [parier - au casino] to gamble ; [ - en Bourse] to play, to gamble ; [ - aux courses] to bet
    jouer au loto sportif ≃ to do the pools (UK), ≃ to play the pools (US)
    jouer à la Bourse to gamble on ou to speculate on ou to play the Stock Exchange
    4. CINÉMA & THÉÂTRE to act, to perform
    jouer dans un film/une pièce to be in a film/a play
    nous jouons à l'Apollo en ce moment at the moment, we are playing at ou our play is on at the Apollo
    bien/mal jouer
    a. [généralement] to be a good/bad musician
    b. [dans un concert] to give a good/bad performance, to play well/badly
    tu joues d'un instrument? do ou can you play an instrument?
    elle joue très bien du piano/de la clarinette she's a very good pianist/a very good clarinet player
    6. [intervenir - facteur] to be of consequence ou of importance ; [ - clause] to apply
    jouer pour ou en faveur de quelqu'un to work in somebody's favour
    jouer contre ou en défaveur de quelqu'un to work against somebody
    7. [se déformer - bois] to warp
    [avoir du jeu] to work loose
    8. [fonctionner]
    a. [pour ouvrir la porte] to turn a key (in a lock)
    b. [pour l'essayer] to try a key (in a lock)
    9. [faire des effets]
    ————————
    [ʒwe] verbe transitif
    1. LOISIRS & SPORT [match, carte] to play
    [pièce d'échecs] to move, to play
    a. CARTES & SPORT well played!
    2. [au casino - somme] to stake, to wager ; [ - numéro] to play (on) (inseparable)
    [au turf - somme] to bet, to stake ; [ - cheval] to bet on (inseparable), to back
    il joue d'énormes sommes he gambles vast sums, he plays for high stakes ou big money
    jouer gros jeu (sens propre & figuré) to play for high stakes ou big money
    3. [risquer - avenir, réputation] to stake
    4. [interpréter - personnage] to play (the part of), to act ; [ - concerto] to play, to perform
    il a très bien joué Cyrano/la fugue he gave an excellent performance as Cyrano/of the fugue
    a. [acteur] to play Brecht, to be in a Brecht play
    b. [troupe] to play Brecht, to put on (a) Brecht (play)
    ne joue pas les innocents! don't play the innocent ou don't act innocent (with me)!
    jouer l'étonnement/le remords to pretend to be surprised/sorry
    jouer un rôle (sens propre & figuré) to play a part
    5. [montrer - film, pièce] to put on (separable), to show
    ————————
    jouer de verbe plus préposition
    1. [se servir de] to make use of, to use
    jouer du couteau/marteau to wield a knife/hammer
    2. [être victime de]
    ————————
    jouer sur verbe plus préposition
    [crédulité, sentiment] to play on (inseparable)
    ————————
    se jouer verbe pronominal (emploi passif)
    [morceau de musique] to be played ou performed
    3. [être en jeu] to be at stake
    ————————
    se jouer verbe pronominal intransitif
    1. [dépendre]
    2. (soutenu) [produire un effet] to play
    ————————
    se jouer de verbe pronominal plus préposition
    1. [ignorer] to ignore

    Dictionnaire Français-Anglais > jouer

  • 18 sotto

    1. prep under
    i bambini sotto cinque anni children under five
    5 gradi sotto zero 5 degrees below (zero)
    sotto la pioggia in the rain
    al di sotto di qualcosa under something
    2. adv below
    ( più in basso) lower down
    ( al di sotto) underneath
    ( al piano di sotto) downstairs
    * * *
    sotto avv.
    1 ( in luogo o posizione inferiore) down; below; under; underneath; beneath: sotto vedevamo la pianura, we could see the plain underneath (o below o beneath); la macchina è qui sotto, the car is down here; il volume che cerchi è lì sotto, the book you're looking for is down there; appendi il quadro più sotto, hang the picture lower down; una torta gelata con sotto uno strato di pan di Spagna, an ice-cream cake with a layer of sponge underneath; mettiti il soprabito e sotto un abito leggero, wear a coat with a light dress underneath // andare sotto, ( affondare) to go down (o under) // sotto sotto, deep down; ( di nascosto) on the quiet; ( in fondo in fondo) underneath: l'acqua era filtrata sotto sotto nelle fondamenta, water had seeped deep down into the foundations; cercava sotto sotto di rovinarmi, on the quiet, he was trying to undermine me; sotto sotto è un buon diavolo, he's a good sort underneath // ci dev'essere sotto qualcosa, (fig.) there must be something behind it // farsi sotto, (fig.) to push oneself forward // guardare qlcu. di sotto in su, to look s.o. up and down // sotto ragazzi, al lavoro!, come on boys, get down to work! // sotto a chi tocca!, whose turn is it next?
    2 ( al piano di sotto) down (stairs): ti aspetto (di) sotto, I'll wait for you downstairs; la famiglia ( che abita) di sotto è di origine polacca, the family below comes from Poland; sotto c'è il negozio, sopra l'abitazione, the shop is downstairs and the living quarters upstairs
    3 ( in seguito, più avanti, in un testo o simili) below: vedi sotto, see below; come da illustrazione qui sotto, as illustrated below; controllare i dati riportati sotto, check the data given below
    4 ( in passivo, in perdita) short (of): eravamo sotto di 120.000 euro, we were 120,000 euros short // (banca) essere sotto, to be in the red; (Borsa) queste azioni sono sotto di due punti, these shares are off two points
    5 al di sotto → disotto.
    * * *
    ['sotto]
    1. prep
    1) (posizione) under, beneath, underneath

    dov'era? — sotto il giornale — where was it? — under o beneath o underneath the newspaper

    si riparò sotto un albero — he sheltered under o beneath o underneath a tree

    sotto la superficie — under o beneath the surface

    si nascose sotto il letto — he hid under o underneath the bed

    sotto le mura — (di città) beneath the walls

    2) (più in basso di) below, (a sud di) south of, below

    sotto il chilo — under o less than a kilo

    4) (soggetto a) under

    tenere qn/qc sott'occhio — to keep an eye on sb/sth

    5) (tempo: in prossimità di) near

    siamo sotto Natale/Pasqua — it's nearly Christmas/Easter

    6)

    (da) analizzare qc sotto un altro aspetto — to examine sth from another point of view

    7)

    (fraseologia) sotto forma di — in the form of

    avere qc sotto il naso/gli occhi — to have sth under one's nose/before one's eyes

    2. avv
    1) (giù) down, (nella parte inferiore) underneath, beneath

    qua/là sotto — down here/there

    qui/lì sotto — down here/there

    sotto, la scatola è rossa — underneath, the box is red

    sei sotto tu! — (nei giochi) you're it!

    2)
    3) (oltre) below
    4) (addosso) underneath
    3. sm inv
    * * *
    ['sotto] 1.
    1) (in posizione inferiore o sottostante) under, beneath, underneath; (in fondo a) at the bottom of

    sotto il o al tavolo under o beneath the table; sotto (a) un lenzuolo under a sheet; mettersi un cuscino sotto la testa to put a cushion under one's head; indossa una camicetta sotto la giacca she is wearing a blouse beneath her jacket; prendi quello sotto la pila take the one at the bottom of the stack; sotto la pioggia in the rain; essere sotto la doccia to be in the shower; buttarsi sotto un treno to throw oneself in front of a train; ti metteranno sotto (in auto) you'll get run over; lo troverai sotto la lettera D you'll find it under the letter D; ce l'hai sotto il naso — fig. it's under your nose

    2) (più in basso di, più in giù di) below; (a sud di) south of, below

    sotto il o al ginocchio below the knee; l'appartamento sotto il o al mio the apartment below mine; sotto (lo) zero below zero; 10 sotto zero 10 below (freezing) o 10 of frost; sotto il livello del mare below sea level; il suo nome era sotto il mio nella lista his name was below mine on the list; Piacenza è sotto Milano — Piacenza is south of Milan

    3) (non oltre) under
    5) (durante un regno, governo ecc.) under, during
    6) (per indicare condizione, influsso) under

    sotto giuramento — under o on oath

    abita sotto di noi — he lives in the flat below us; (alle dipendenze)

    avere qcn. sotto di sé — to have sb. under one

    9) al di sotto di below, beneath, underneath

    al di sotto della media — below (the) average, below standard

    temperature al di sotto dei 5°C — temperatures under 5°C

    2.
    1) (nella parte inferiore, in basso) below, beneath, underneath; (in fondo) at the bottom

    qua sotto, là sotto — under o down here, under o down there

    2) (al piano inferiore) downstairs
    3) (oltre) below

    vedi sotto — see below o under

    3.
    aggettivo invariabile (inferiore) below
    4.
    sostantivo maschile invariabile (parte inferiore) bottom (part)
    ••

    sotto sotto — (nell'intimo) deep down, underneath; (di nascosto) on the quiet

    farsi sotto — (proporsi) to put o push oneself forward

    * * *
    sotto
    /'sotto/
     1 (in posizione inferiore o sottostante) under, beneath, underneath; (in fondo a) at the bottom of; sotto il o al tavolo under o beneath the table; sotto (a) un lenzuolo under a sheet; mettersi un cuscino sotto la testa to put a cushion under one's head; indossa una camicetta sotto la giacca she is wearing a blouse beneath her jacket; prendi quello sotto la pila take the one at the bottom of the stack; sotto la pioggia in the rain; essere sotto la doccia to be in the shower; buttarsi sotto un treno to throw oneself in front of a train; ti metteranno sotto (in auto) you'll get run over; lo troverai sotto la lettera D you'll find it under the letter D; ce l'hai sotto il naso fig. it's under your nose
     2 (più in basso di, più in giù di) below; (a sud di) south of, below; sotto il o al ginocchio below the knee; l'appartamento sotto il o al mio the apartment below mine; sotto (lo) zero below zero; 10 sotto zero 10 below (freezing) o 10 of frost; sotto il livello del mare below sea level; il suo nome era sotto il mio nella lista his name was below mine on the list; Piacenza è sotto Milano Piacenza is south of Milan
     3 (non oltre) under; bambini sotto i sei anni children under six; gli assegni sotto i 500 euro cheques for under 500 euros
     4 (in prossimità di) near; sotto le feste natalizie at Christmastime; sotto gli esami during examination time
     5 (durante un regno, governo ecc.) under, during
     6 (per indicare condizione, influsso) under; sotto anestesia under anaesthetic; sotto antibiotici on antibiotics; sotto l'effetto dell'alcol under the influence of alcohol; sotto pressione under pressure (anche fig.); sotto processo on trial; sotto falso nome under an assumed name; sotto giuramento under o on oath; nato sotto il segno del Leone born under (the sign of) Leo
     7 (in rapporto a) sotto questo punto di vista from this point of view; sotto certi aspetti in some respects
     8 sotto di (a un piano inferiore) abita sotto di noi he lives in the flat below us; (alle dipendenze) avere qcn. sotto di sé to have sb. under one; le persone sotto di lui nel reparto the people below him in the department
     9 al di sotto di below, beneath, underneath; al di sotto della media below (the) average, below standard; i bambini al di sotto dei 13 anni children under 13; temperature al di sotto dei 5°C temperatures under 5°C; essere al di sotto del limite di velocità to be inside the speed limit
     1 (nella parte inferiore, in basso) below, beneath, underneath; (in fondo) at the bottom; due metri sotto two metres below; va sotto o sopra? does it go under or over? indossa una maglietta con niente sotto she's wearing a T-shirt with nothing beneath o underneath; il prezzo è segnato sotto the price is marked underneath; da sotto from below; dammi quello sotto give me the one at the bottom o underneath; qua sotto, là sotto under o down here, under o down there
     2 (al piano inferiore) downstairs; il rumore viene da sotto the noise is coming from downstairs
     3 (oltre) below; vedi sotto see below o under
     5 (in svantaggio) down; sotto di due goal two goals down
      (inferiore) below; il piano sotto the floor below; la riga sotto the line below
    IV m.inv.
      (parte inferiore) bottom (part)
    sotto sotto (nell'intimo) deep down, underneath; (di nascosto) on the quiet; sotto a chi tocca! who's next? c'è sotto qualcos'altro there's more to this than meets the eye; farsi sotto (proporsi) to put o push oneself forward.

    Dizionario Italiano-Inglese > sotto

  • 19 lead

    I
    1. li:d past tense, past participle - led; verb
    1) (to guide or direct or cause to go in a certain direction: Follow my car and I'll lead you to the motorway; She took the child by the hand and led him across the road; He was leading the horse into the stable; The sound of hammering led us to the garage; You led us to believe that we would be paid!) llevar, conducir
    2) (to go or carry to a particular place or along a particular course: A small path leads through the woods.) llevar
    3) ((with to) to cause or bring about a certain situation or state of affairs: The heavy rain led to serious floods.) ocasionar
    4) (to be first (in): An official car led the procession; He is still leading in the competition.) liderar
    5) (to live (a certain kind of life): She leads a pleasant existence on a Greek island.) llevar

    2. noun
    1) (the front place or position: He has taken over the lead in the race.) delantera
    2) (the state of being first: We have a lead over the rest of the world in this kind of research.) liderato
    3) (the act of leading: We all followed his lead.) liderazgo
    4) (the amount by which one is ahead of others: He has a lead of twenty metres (over the man in second place).) ventaja
    5) (a leather strap or chain for leading a dog etc: All dogs must be kept on a lead.) correa
    6) (a piece of information which will help to solve a mystery etc: The police have several leads concerning the identity of the thief.) pista
    7) (a leading part in a play etc: Who plays the lead in that film?) primer papel, papel principal, papel protagonista
    •
    - leadership
    - lead on
    - lead up the garden path
    - lead up to
    - lead the way
    II led noun
    1) ((also adjective) (of) an element, a soft, heavy, bluish-grey metal: lead pipes; Are these pipes made of lead or copper?) plomo
    2) (the part of a pencil that leaves a mark: The lead of my pencil has broken.) mina
    •
    lead1 n
    1. mina
    2. plomo
    lead2 n
    1. ventaja
    2. delantera
    who's in the lead? ¿quién lleva la delantera? / ¿quién va ganando?
    3. papel principal
    4. correa
    where's the dog's lead? ¿dónde está la correa del perro?
    5. cable eléctrico
    lead3 vb
    1. llevar / conducir
    where does this path lead? ¿adónde conduce este sendero?
    2. dirigir / liderar
    3. ir primero / ganar / llevar la delantera
    to lead a... life llevar una vida...
    El pasado y participio pasado de lead es led; se pronuncia más o menos lid, con una i larga
    tr[led]
    1 (metal) plomo
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    lead poisoning saturnismo
    ————————
    tr[liːd]
    transitive verb (pt & pp lead tr[led])
    1 (guide) llevar, conducir
    2 (be leader of) liderar, dirigir
    3 (be first in) ocupar el primer puesto en
    4 (influence) llevar
    5 (life) llevar
    6 SMALLMUSIC/SMALL (orchestra) ser el primer violín de
    7 (us mus) dirigir
    8 (cards) salir con
    1 (road) conducir, llevar (to, a)
    2 (command) tener el mando
    3 (go first) ir primero,-a; (in race) llevar la delantera
    4 (cards) salir
    1 (front position) delantera
    2 SMALLSPORT/SMALL liderato (difference) ventaja
    3 SMALLTHEATRE/SMALL primer papel nombre masculino
    4 SMALLBRITISH ENGLISH/SMALL (for dog) correa
    5 SMALLELECTRICITY/SMALL cable nombre masculino
    6 (clue) pista
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    to be in the lead ir en cabeza
    to follow somebody's lead seguir el ejemplo de alguien
    to lead a dog's life llevar una vida de perros
    to lead somebody to believe something llevar a alguien a creer algo
    to lead the way enseñar el camino
    to take the lead (in race) tomar la delantera 2 (in score) adelantarse en el marcador
    lead time tiempo de planificación y producción
    lead ['li:d] vt, led ['lɛd] ; leading
    1) guide: conducir, llevar, guiar
    2) direct: dirigir
    3) head: encabezar, ir al frente de
    4)
    to lead to : resultar en, llevar a
    it only leads to trouble: sólo resulta en problemas
    lead n
    : delantera f, primer lugar m
    to take the lead: tomar la delantera
    lead ['lɛd] n
    1) : plomo m (metal)
    2) : mina f (de lápiz)
    3)
    lead poisoning : saturnismo m
    n.
    n.
    • regleta s.f.
    adj.
    • de plomo adj.
    n.
    • avance s.m.
    • delantera s.f.
    • liderato s.m.
    • mando s.m.
    • plomo (Química) s.m.
    v.
    (§ p.,p.p.: led) = acaudillar v.
    • adiestrar v.
    • aportar v.
    • capitanear v.
    • carear v.
    • comandar v.
    • conducir v.
    • dirigir v.
    • encabezar v.
    • gobernar v.
    • guiar v.
    • mandar v.
    v.
    • emplomar v.

    I
    1) noun
    2) led
    u ( metal) plomo m

    as heavy as lead: my feet felt as heavy as lead los pies me pesaban como (un) plomo; (before n) lead crystal cristal m ( que contiene óxido de plomo y es muy preciado); lead poisoning — intoxicación f por plomo; ( chronic disease) saturnismo m

    3) c u ( in pencil) mina f; (before n)

    lead pencil — lápiz m (de mina)

    ( in competition) (no pl)

    to be in/hold the lead — llevar/conservar la delantera

    to move into the lead, to take the lead — tomar la delantera

    she has a lead of 20 meters/points over her nearest rival — le lleva 20 metros/puntos de ventaja a su rival más cercano

    5) (example, leadership) (no pl) ejemplo m

    to give a lead — dar* (el) ejemplo

    to follow o take somebody's lead — seguir* el ejemplo de alguien

    6) c ( clue) pista f
    7) c
    a) ( for dog) (BrE) correa f, traílla f
    b) ( Elec) cable m
    8) c
    a) ( main role) papel m principal

    the male/female lead — ( role) el papel principal masculino/femenino; ( person) el primer actor/la primera actriz

    b) ( Mus) solista mf

    to sing/play (the) lead — ser* la voz/el músico solista; (before n) <guitar, singer> principal

    9) c ( cards) (no pl)

    it was her lead — salía ella, ella era mano


    II
    1. liːd
    (past & past p led) transitive verb
    1)
    a) (guide, conduct) \<\<person/animal\>\> llevar, guiar*

    to lead somebody TO something/somebody — conducir* or llevar a alguien a algo/ante alguien

    to lead somebody away/off — llevarse a alguien

    lead the way! — ve tú delante or (esp AmL) adelante!

    b) (to a particular state, course of action)

    to lead somebody into temptation — hacer* caer a alguien en la tentación

    to lead somebody TO something/+ INF: this led me to the conclusion that... esto me hizo llegar a la conclusión de que...; what led you to resign? ¿qué te llevó a dimitir?; I was led to believe that... — me dieron a entender que...

    c) ( influence)
    2) (head, have charge of) \<\<discussion\>\> conducir*; \<\<orchestra\>\> ( conduct) (AmE) dirigir*; ( play first violin in) (BrE) ser* el primer violín de
    3)
    a) ( be at front of) \<\<parade/attack\>\> encabezar*, ir* al frente de
    b) (in race, competition) \<\<opponent\>\> aventajar

    they led the opposing team by ten points — aventajaban al equipo contrario por diez puntos, le llevaban diez puntos de ventaja al equipo contrario

    to lead the field — ( Sport) ir* en cabeza or a la cabeza, llevar la delantera

    4) \<\<life\>\> llevar
    5) ( play) \<\<trumps/hearts\>\> salir* con

    2.
    vi
    1)

    to lead TO something — \<\<road/path/steps\>\> llevar or conducir* or dar* a algo; \<\<door\>\> dar* a algo

    2)
    a) (be, act as leader)

    you lead, we'll follow — ve delante or (esp AmL) adelante, que te seguimos

    b) (in race, competition) \<\<competitor\>\> ir* a la cabeza, puntear (AmL)
    3)
    a) ( Journ)

    `The Times' leads with the budget deficit — `The Times' dedica su artículo de fondo al déficit presupuestario

    b) ( in cards) salir*, ser* mano
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    I [led]
    1.
    N (=metal) plomo m ; (in pencil) mina f ; (Naut) sonda f, escandallo m

    my limbs felt like lead or as heavy as lead — los brazos y las piernas me pesaban como plomo

    - swing the lead
    2.

    lead acetate N — acetato m de plomo

    lead crystal N — cristal m (que contiene óxido de plomo)

    lead oxide N — óxido m de plomo

    lead paint N — pintura f a base de plomo

    lead pipe N — tubería f de plomo

    lead poisoning N — saturnismo m, plumbismo m, intoxicación f por el plomo

    lead replacement petrol N — (gasolina f) súper f aditiva, (gasolina f) súper f con aditivos

    lead weight N — peso m plomo


    II [liːd] (vb: pt, pp led)
    1. N
    1) (=leading position) (Sport) delantera f, cabeza f ; (=distance, time, points ahead) ventaja f

    • to be in the lead — (gen) ir a la or en cabeza, ir primero; (Sport) llevar la delantera; (in league) ocupar el primer puesto

    • to have two minutes' lead over sb — llevar a algn una ventaja de dos minutos

    • to take the lead — (Sport) tomar la delantera; (=take the initiative) tomar la iniciativa

    2) (=example) ejemplo m

    • to follow sb's lead — seguir el ejemplo de algn

    • to give sb a lead — guiar a algn, dar el ejemplo a algn, mostrar el camino a algn

    3) (=clue) pista f, indicación f

    • to follow up a lead — seguir or investigar una pista

    4) (Theat) papel m principal; (in opera) voz f cantante; (=person) primer actor m, primera actriz f

    • to play the lead — tener el papel principal

    • to sing the lead — llevar la voz cantante

    • with Greta Garbo in the lead — con Greta Garbo en el primer papel

    5) (=leash) cuerda f, traílla f, correa f (LAm)

    • dogs must be kept on a lead — los perros deben llevarse con traílla

    6) (Elec) cable m
    7) (Cards)

    whose lead is it? — ¿quién sale?, ¿quién es mano?

    it's my lead — soy mano, salgo yo

    it's your lead — tú eres mano, sales tú

    • if the lead is in hearts — si la salida es a corazones

    8) (Press) primer párrafo m, entrada f
    2. VT
    1) (=conduct) llevar, conducir

    • to lead sb to a table — conducir a algn a una mesa

    what led you to Venice? — ¿qué te llevó a Venecia?, ¿con qué motivo fuiste a Venecia?

    • this discussion is leading us nowhere — esta discusión no nos lleva a ninguna parte

    • to lead the way — (lit) ir primero; (fig) mostrar el camino, dar el ejemplo

    2) (=be the leader of) [+ government] dirigir, encabezar; [+ party] encabezar, ser jefe de; [+ expedition, regiment] mandar; [+ discussion] conducir; [+ team] capitanear; [+ league] ir a la or en cabeza de, encabezar, ocupar el primer puesto en; [+ procession] ir a la or en cabeza de, encabezar; [+ orchestra] (Brit) ser el primer violín en; (US) dirigir
    3) (=be first in)

    • to lead the field — (Sport) ir a la cabeza, llevar la delantera

    • Britain led the world in textiles — Inglaterra era el líder mundial en la industria textil

    4) (=be in front of) [+ opponent] aventajar

    • Roberts leads Brown by four games to one — Roberts le aventaja a Brown por cuatro juegos a uno

    5) [+ life, existence] llevar

    • to lead a busy life — llevar una vida muy ajetreada

    to lead a full life — llevar or tener una vida muy activa, llevar or tener una vida llena de actividades

    dance 1., 1), life 1., 3)
    6) (=influence)

    to lead sb to do sth — llevar or inducir or mover a algn a hacer algo

    • we were led to believe that... — nos hicieron creer que...

    • what led you to this conclusion? — ¿qué te hizo llegar a esta conclusión?

    • he is easily led — es muy sugestionable

    • to lead sb into error — inducir a algn a error

    3. VI
    1) (=go in front) ir primero
    2) (in match, race) llevar la delantera

    he is leading by an hour/ten metres — lleva una hora/diez metros de ventaja

    3) (Cards) ser mano, salir

    you lead — sales tú, tú eres mano

    4) (=be in control) estar al mando
    5)

    • to lead to — [street, corridor] conducir a; [door] dar a

    this street leads to the station — esta calle conduce a la estación, por esta calle se va a la estación

    this street leads to the main square — esta calle sale a or desemboca en la plaza principal

    6) (=result in)

    • to lead to — llevar a

    one thing led to another... — una cosa nos/los etc llevó a otra...

    4.
    CPD

    lead story N — reportaje m principal

    lead time N — plazo m de entrega

    * * *

    I
    1) noun
    2) [led]
    u ( metal) plomo m

    as heavy as lead: my feet felt as heavy as lead los pies me pesaban como (un) plomo; (before n) lead crystal cristal m ( que contiene óxido de plomo y es muy preciado); lead poisoning — intoxicación f por plomo; ( chronic disease) saturnismo m

    3) c u ( in pencil) mina f; (before n)

    lead pencil — lápiz m (de mina)

    4) [liːd]
    ( in competition) (no pl)

    to be in/hold the lead — llevar/conservar la delantera

    to move into the lead, to take the lead — tomar la delantera

    she has a lead of 20 meters/points over her nearest rival — le lleva 20 metros/puntos de ventaja a su rival más cercano

    5) (example, leadership) (no pl) ejemplo m

    to give a lead — dar* (el) ejemplo

    to follow o take somebody's lead — seguir* el ejemplo de alguien

    6) c ( clue) pista f
    7) c
    a) ( for dog) (BrE) correa f, traílla f
    b) ( Elec) cable m
    8) c
    a) ( main role) papel m principal

    the male/female lead — ( role) el papel principal masculino/femenino; ( person) el primer actor/la primera actriz

    b) ( Mus) solista mf

    to sing/play (the) lead — ser* la voz/el músico solista; (before n) <guitar, singer> principal

    9) c ( cards) (no pl)

    it was her lead — salía ella, ella era mano


    II
    1. [liːd]
    (past & past p led) transitive verb
    1)
    a) (guide, conduct) \<\<person/animal\>\> llevar, guiar*

    to lead somebody TO something/somebody — conducir* or llevar a alguien a algo/ante alguien

    to lead somebody away/off — llevarse a alguien

    lead the way! — ve tú delante or (esp AmL) adelante!

    b) (to a particular state, course of action)

    to lead somebody into temptation — hacer* caer a alguien en la tentación

    to lead somebody TO something/+ INF: this led me to the conclusion that... esto me hizo llegar a la conclusión de que...; what led you to resign? ¿qué te llevó a dimitir?; I was led to believe that... — me dieron a entender que...

    c) ( influence)
    2) (head, have charge of) \<\<discussion\>\> conducir*; \<\<orchestra\>\> ( conduct) (AmE) dirigir*; ( play first violin in) (BrE) ser* el primer violín de
    3)
    a) ( be at front of) \<\<parade/attack\>\> encabezar*, ir* al frente de
    b) (in race, competition) \<\<opponent\>\> aventajar

    they led the opposing team by ten points — aventajaban al equipo contrario por diez puntos, le llevaban diez puntos de ventaja al equipo contrario

    to lead the field — ( Sport) ir* en cabeza or a la cabeza, llevar la delantera

    4) \<\<life\>\> llevar
    5) ( play) \<\<trumps/hearts\>\> salir* con

    2.
    vi
    1)

    to lead TO something — \<\<road/path/steps\>\> llevar or conducir* or dar* a algo; \<\<door\>\> dar* a algo

    2)
    a) (be, act as leader)

    you lead, we'll follow — ve delante or (esp AmL) adelante, que te seguimos

    b) (in race, competition) \<\<competitor\>\> ir* a la cabeza, puntear (AmL)
    3)
    a) ( Journ)

    `The Times' leads with the budget deficit — `The Times' dedica su artículo de fondo al déficit presupuestario

    b) ( in cards) salir*, ser* mano
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    English-spanish dictionary > lead

  • 20 mano

    f (pl -i) hand
    a portata di mano within reach
    fuori mano out of the way, not easy to get at
    fig alla mano approachable
    di seconda mano second-hand
    dare una mano a qualcuno give someone a hand
    mettere mano a qualcosa start something
    lavo le pentole che sporco a mano a mano I wash the dirty pots as I go along
    tenersi per mano hold hands
    man mano che as (and when)
    ha le mani bucate money just slips through his fingers
    mani in alto! hands up!
    * * *
    mano s.f.
    1 hand: mani affusolate, callose, tozze, slender, horny, stubby hands; la mano destra, sinistra, the right, left hand; le linee della mano, the lines of the hand; mi sono fatto male alla mano, I hurt my hand; vai a lavarti le mani, go and wash your hands; avere qlco. in mano, to have sthg. in one's hand; battere le mani, to clap (one's hands); consegnare, trasportare qlco. a mano, to deliver, to carry sthg. by hand; passeggiare mano nella mano, to walk hand in hand; alzare la mano, to put one's hand up; voto per alzata di mano, voting by show of hands // mani in alto!, hands up!; giù le mani!, hands off! // (calcio) fallo di mano, hands ball // avere le mani pulite, sporche, (anche fig.) to have clean, dirty hands; il nostro è un partito dalle mani pulite, there's no taint of corruption in our party // stringere la mano, le mani a qlcu., to shake hands with s.o.; qua la mano!, let's shake hands!; stretta di mano, handshake
    2 (parte, lato) side: contro mano, (di veicoli ecc.) on the wrong side of the road; tenere la propria mano, (nella circolazione stradale) to keep to one's own side of the road
    3 (potere, balìa) hand; power: cadde in mano al nemico, he fell into the enemy's hands; i terroristi hanno ancora in mano cinque ostaggi, the terrorists still have five hostages in their hands; il mio destino è nelle tue mani, my fate is in your hands; quella proprietà non è più nelle sue mani, that property is no longer in his hands; quell'uomo è in mia mano, that man is in my power; avere in mano il successo, to have success within one's grasp
    4 (scrittura) handwriting, (form.) hand: di sua mano, in his own hand; ha una bella mano, he has beautiful handwriting
    5 (tocco) touch (anche fig.): mano da maestro, masterly touch; si riconosce facilmente la mano di un maestro, it is easy to recognize the hand of a master; mano leggera, (di medico ecc.) light touch; dare l'ultima mano a un quadro, to give the finishing touch to a work // avere la mano pesante, to be heavy-handed
    6 (strato di colore, vernice ecc.) coat: mano di finitura, finishing coat; mano di fondo, primer (o priming o undercoat); una mano di vernice, a coat of varnish; mano isolante, sealer; occorre dare un'altra mano di bianco al soffitto, we have to give another coat of white to the ceiling
    7 (alle carte) hand: mano fortunata, lucky hand; facciamo ancora una mano, let's play one more hand // chi è di mano?, (a chi tocca iniziare il gioco?) whose lead is it?
    8 mano d'opera → manodopera.
    ◆ FRASEOLOGIA: fatto a mano, handmade; tessuto a mano, handwoven // (mus.): pezzo a quattro mani, a piece for four hands; suonare a quattro mani, to play piano duets // di mano in mano, from hand to hand // a mani vuote, empty-handed // a piene mani, in (o by) handfuls: attinse a piene mani dai classici, he drew liberally on the classics // a mano armata, by force of (o under) arms: rapina a mano armata, holdup (o armed robbery) // a man salva, with impunity (o unopposed) // paga sempre denaro alla mano, (pronta cassa) he always pays (in) cash (o ready money); presentarsi al controllo documenti alla mano, have your documents ready for checking // scappare, sfuggire di mano, to slip through one's fingers: il vaso mi è sfuggito di mano accidentalmente, the vase slipped out of my hands accidentally; la situazione gli è sfuggita di mano, he couldn't keep the situation in hand (o he lost control of the situation); mi è sfuggito dalle mani un buon affare, a good deal slipped through my fingers // ho in mano le prove di quanto asserisco, I have evidence of what I say in my hands // di prima, di seconda mano, first-hand, second-hand: articolo di seconda mano, second-hand article; notizie di prima mano, first-hand news // disegno a mano libera, free-hand drawing // luogo fuori mano, out of the way place // una persona alla mano, an easygoing person // gli restituirò il denaro man mano, I shall give him the money back little by little; man mano che andava avanti si stancava sempre più, as he went on he got more and more tired; man mano che invecchia diventa sempre più avaro, the older he gets the meaner he grows // ha le mani di pastafrolla, he's a butterfingers // ho le mani legate, (fig.) my hands are tied // avere le mani in pasta, to have one's finger in the pie // me ne lavo le mani, I wash my hands of it // mi prudono le mani!, I could hit you! // mettere le mani su qlco., to lay hands on sthg. // non ci metterei la mano sul fuoco, I would not stake my life on it (o wouldn't swear to it) // possono darsi la mano, (fig.) they are two of a kind // puoi darmi una mano, per piacere?, can you give me a hand, please? // alzare le mani contro qlcu., to lift one's hand against s.o. // avere le mani bucate, to be a spendthrift // avere le mani lunghe, (per rubare) to have light fingers; un uomo svelto di mano, (ladruncolo) a light-fingered man (o a pilferer) // il nuovo direttore ha le mani lunghe, (facile a toccare le donne) the new manager can't keep his hands to himself // tenere qlco. a portata di mano, to have sthg. handy (o at hand o within easy reach o ready) // avere qlco. per le mani, to have sthg. in hand // fare la mano a qlco., to get one's hand in at sthg. // caricare la mano, to exaggerate // chiedere, domandare la mano di qlcu., to ask s.o.'s hand in marriage // essere in buone mani, to be in good hands // fare man bassa di qlco., to plunder (o loot) sthg.; i ragazzi hanno fatto man bassa di tutto ciò che c'era da mangiare, the kids made short work of everything that there was to eat // il cavallo gli ha preso la mano, he lost control of the horse; farsi prendere la mano da qlco., to lose control of sthg. // forzare la mano a qlcu., to force s.o.'s hand // lasciare mano libera a qlcu., to allow (o to give) s.o. a free hand // mi sarei mangiato le mani per essermi lasciato sfuggire quell'affare, I could kick myself for losing that deal // menar le mani, to fight // non ho ancora potuto metter mano al nuovo lavoro, I still haven't been able to get started on (o get down to) that new job // mettere mano alla penna, to put pen to paper // mettere mano alla spada, to draw one's sword // mettere mano alla borsa, (fig.) to open one's purse strings // mettere le mani avanti, to be on the safe side: in ogni caso ti conviene metter le mani avanti e definire al più presto la tua posizione, in any case it would be a good idea for you to play safe and clarify your position as soon as possible // mettersi in mano a, nelle mani di un buon medico, to put oneself into the hands of a good doctor // portare qlcu. in palma di mano, to hold s.o. in the palm of one's hand // prendere il coraggio a due mani, to take one's courage in both hands // stare con le mani in mano, to twiddle one's thumbs (o to remain idle): non stare lì con le mani in mano!, don't stand there doing nothing! (o twiddling your thumbs!) // tendere la mano, (elemosinare) to beg; tendere la mano a qlcu., to hold out a hand to s.o. (o to give a helping hand to s.o. o to give s.o. a hand) // tener mano a qlcu., to aid and abet s.o. // toccare con mano (qlco.), to see (sthg.) for oneself // venire alle mani, to come to blows // la mano sinistra non sappia quello che fa la destra, (prov.) let not your left hand know what your right hand is doing // una mano lava l'altra, (prov.) you scratch my back and I'll scratch yours.
    * * *
    ['mano]
    sostantivo femminile
    1) hand

    salutare qcn. con la mano — to wave at sb.

    -i in alto, su le -i! — hands up!

    tenere qcs. in mano — to hold sth. in one's hand

    prendere qcn. per mano — to take sb. by the hand (anche fig.)

    attingere qcs. a piene -i — fig. to pick up handfuls of sth.

    sporcarsi le -i — to dirty one's hands, to get one's hands dirty (anche fig.)

    mettere mano al portafogli — to put one's money where one's mouth is, to put one's hand in one's pocket

    dare una mano a qcn. — to give o lend sb. a (helping) hand

    3) (indicando il controllo, il possesso) hand

    avere qcs. sotto mano — to have sth. on hand

    tenere qcs. a portata di mano — to keep sth. handy

    essere nelle -i di qcn. — [potere, impresa] to be in sb.'s hands

    cadere nelle -i di qcn. — to fall into sb.'s hands

    di prima, seconda mano — firsthand, second-hand

    fare o prendere la mano a to get one's hand in; avere la mano leggera to have a light touch; avere la mano pesante to be heavy-handed; avere la mano felice — to be skillful o skilled

    6) gioc. (a carte) hand
    8) (di colore) coat, layer

    fare qcs. a mano — to do o make sth. by hand

    10) alla mano (pronto da usare, esibire)

    minacciare qcn. coltello alla mano — to threaten sb. at knife point

    è arrivata con prove alla mano — she had concrete proof; (semplice) [ persona] informal

    11) man mano, (a) mano a mano little by little

    man mano che — as

    12) fuori mano [paese, sentiero] out of the way; [ abitare] off the beaten track
    ••

    chiedere la mano di qcn. — to ask for sb.'s hand

    avere le -i di burro o di pastafrolla to be butterfingered; arrivare a -i vuote to arrive empty-handed; qua la mano! put it there! shake! give o slip me some skin! AE; man forte manforte; una mano lava l'altra you scratch my back and I'll scratch yours; essere preso con le -i nel sacco to be caught red-handed; alzare le -i su qcn. mettere le -i addosso a qcn. to lay a finger o hand on sb.; mettere le -i avanti to play (it) safe; stare con le -i in mano to sit o stand idly by; avere le -i lunghe (rubare) to be light- o nimble-fingered, to have sticky fingers colloq.; (essere influente) to have a lot of influence; avere le -i in pasta to have a finger in every pie; farsi o lasciarsi prendere la mano to lose control of the situation; toccare con mano — to experience first hand

    * * *
    mano
    /'mano/ ⇒ 4
    sostantivo f.
     1 hand; salutare qcn. con la mano to wave at sb.; -i in alto, su le -i! hands up! mano nella mano hand in hand; passare di mano in mano to pass from hand to hand; tenere qcs. in mano to hold sth. in one's hand; tenersi per mano to hold hands; prendere qcn. per mano to take sb. by the hand (anche fig.); attingere qcs. a piene -i fig. to pick up handfuls of sth.; a -i nude with one's bare hands; suonare il piano a quattro -i to play a duet on the piano; disegnare a mano libera to draw freehand; rapina a mano armata armed robbery; sporcarsi le -i to dirty one's hands, to get one's hands dirty (anche fig.); mettere mano al portafogli to put one's money where one's mouth is, to put one's hand in one's pocket
     2 (aiuto) dare una mano a qcn. to give o lend sb. a (helping) hand
     3 (indicando il controllo, il possesso) hand; cambiare mano to change hands; avere qcs. sotto mano to have sth. on hand; mi è capitato tra le -i I just happened to come across it; tenere qcs. a portata di mano to keep sth. handy; essere nelle -i di qcn. [potere, impresa] to be in sb.'s hands; prendere in mano la situazione to take matters into one's own hands; in buone -i in good hands; in -i sicure in safe hands; cadere nelle -i di qcn. to fall into sb.'s hands; di prima, seconda mano firsthand, second-hand
     4 (stile) riconoscere la mano di un artista to recognize an artist's style
     5 (denotando l'abilità) fare o prendere la mano a to get one's hand in; avere la mano leggera to have a light touch; avere la mano pesante to be heavy-handed; avere la mano felice to be skillful o skilled
     6 gioc. (a carte) hand; passare la mano to pass (anche fig.)
     8 (di colore) coat, layer
     9 a mano fare qcs. a mano to do o make sth. by hand; fatto a mano handmade; dipinto a mano hand-painted
     10 alla mano (pronto da usare, esibire) minacciare qcn. coltello alla mano to threaten sb. at knife point; è arrivata con prove alla mano she had concrete proof; (semplice) [ persona] informal
     11 man mano, (a) mano a mano little by little; preferisco informarli man mano I prefer to inform them as I go along; man mano che as
     12 fuori mano [paese, sentiero] out of the way; [ abitare] off the beaten track
    chiedere la mano di qcn. to ask for sb.'s hand; ci metterei la mano sul fuoco I'm willing to bet on it; fare man bassa to sweep the board; venire alle -i to come to blows; avere le -i di burro o di pastafrolla to be butterfingered; arrivare a -i vuote to arrive empty-handed; qua la mano! put it there! shake! give o slip me some skin! AE; man forte→  manforte; una mano lava l'altra you scratch my back and I'll scratch yours; essere preso con le -i nel sacco to be caught red-handed; alzare le -i su qcn., mettere le -i addosso a qcn. to lay a finger o hand on sb.; mettere le -i avanti to play (it) safe; stare con le -i in mano to sit o stand idly by; avere le -i lunghe (rubare) to be light- o nimble-fingered, to have sticky fingers colloq.; (essere influente) to have a lot of influence; avere le -i in pasta to have a finger in every pie; farsi o lasciarsi prendere la mano to lose control of the situation; toccare con mano to experience first hand.

    Dizionario Italiano-Inglese > mano

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • One-China policy — The One China policy (simplified Chinese: 一个中国; traditional Chinese: 一個中國 政策 ; pinyin: yī gè Zhōngguó) refers to the policy or view that there is only one state called China , despite the existence of two governments that claim to be China …   Wikipedia

  • influence — n Influence, authority, prestige, weight, credit are comparable when they mean power exerted over the minds or acts of others either without apparent effort or as the result of the qualities, the position, or the reputation of the person or thing …   New Dictionary of Synonyms

  • One Life to Live storylines (1990–1999) — One Life to Live is an American soap opera that has been broadcast on the ABC network since 1968. The series starts with One Life to Live storylines (1968–1979). The plot continues in One Life to Live storylines (1980–1989). The plot in the next… …   Wikipedia

  • One Piece — redirects here. For the clothing, see One piece swimsuit. One Piece First volume of One Piece, released in Japan by Shueisha on December 24, 1997 ONE PIEC …   Wikipedia

  • One Australia policy — One Australia was the immigration and ethnic affairs policy of the Liberal National opposition in Australia, released in 1988. The One Australia policy proclaimed a vision of one nation and one future . It called for an end to multiculturalism… …   Wikipedia

  • One-drop rule — The one drop rule is a historical colloquial term in the United States for the social classification as black of individuals with any African ancestry; meaning any person with one drop of black blood was considered as black. The principle was an… …   Wikipedia

  • One Thousand and One Nights — Arabian Nights redirects here. For other uses, see Arabian Nights (disambiguation). For other uses, see One Thousand and One Nights (disambiguation). Arab World …   Wikipedia

  • One-hit wonder — OHW redirects here. For the facility known as Ontario Hospital, Whitby , see Whitby Psychiatric Hospital. For other uses, see One Hit Wonder (disambiguation). A one hit wonder is a person or act known mainly for only a single success. The term is …   Wikipedia

  • Influence and reception of Friedrich Nietzsche — Friedrich Nietzsche s influence and reception was heterogeneous and may roughly be divided into various chronological periods.Members on both the left and the right wing tried to appropriate his works quite early. In 1937, Georges Bataille… …   Wikipedia

  • One World Trade Center — Freedom Tower redirects here. For other uses, see Freedom Tower (disambiguation). For the building complex destroyed in the September 11 attacks, see World Trade Center. For the specific WTC building formerly known as One World Trade Center, see… …   Wikipedia

  • Spider-Man: One More Day — One More Day Cover for The Amazing Spider Man #545, the final chapter of the story arc. Art by Joe Quesada. Publisher Marvel Comics …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»